{"title":"All products","description":"\u003cp\u003eDiscover the entire range of Krollit products: machine tools, professional equipment, and accessories for woodworking, metalworking, sheet metal working, and construction. In this category, you'll find power and hand tools, workshop machinery, spare parts, dust extraction systems, compressed air equipment, work equipment, and technical solutions for professionals and DIY enthusiasts. All products are selected to guarantee quality, reliability, and high performance in every project.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"bernardo-ad-310-400v","title":"Bernardo AD 310 Planer Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 310 planer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 310 mm, a jointer table of 1,610 mm, a Ø 95 mm shaft with 4 HSS knives at 4,300 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 225 mm, a feed rate of 6 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Produced in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,610 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 225 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaner shaft:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 95 mm – 4 HSS knives – 4,300 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 295 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 310 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 310 is the benchmark combination planer for joinery and artisan workshops requiring planing up to 310 mm in continuous cycles. Its 295 kg structural weight distinguishes it from entry-level planers weighing 150-180 kg: the mass provides stability during passes on hardwoods like oak and ash, where lighter machines exhibit micro-vibrations visible on the finished surface. The non-deformable cast iron tables offer flatness over time, even with temperature variations in the workshop, a critical factor for window and door manufacturers and furniture makers working to tight tolerances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Bernardo range of combination planers, the AD 310 occupies the entry-professional segment: above hobby planers with 2.2 kW motors and 150 kg structures, and below the ADM 300 models which add a helical feed roller and sound-absorbing lips for extended industrial cycles. The choice between AD 310 and ADM 300 depends on the intensity of use: for shifts up to 6 hours, the AD 310 is sufficient; beyond 6 continuous daily hours, the ADM 300 reduces the risk of thermal stops. Switching from jointer to thicknesser is managed by the double tilting of the rear tables, an operation that takes less than 60 seconds in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts (HSS knives, belts, bearings) available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo AD 310 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOversized machine for occasional use: the 400V three-phase motor requires a dedicated electrical system. Consider a single-phase version if available.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm covers 95% of work on standard boards and panels. The 295 kg provides stability without special foundation. 400V three-phase is the standard in Italian joinery workshops.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor shifts exceeding 6 hours daily, consider the ADM 300 with helical roller and sound-absorbing lips, designed for more intensive cycles without thermal stops.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops with only 230V single-phase power without the possibility of a three-phase system; processing panels wider than 310 mm (consider the AD 410); workshops requiring variable selectable feed (the AD 310 has a fixed feed of 6 m\/min).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,610 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e910 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaner shaft – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,300 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 225 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – 50Hz – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,610 × 1,045 × 1,100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 295 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, limit switch for unintentional restart prevention, planer shaft protection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push block\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShaft protection guard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the AD 310 work with 230V single-phase power?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Bernardo AD 310 – 400V requires 400V three-phase power. For workshops with only a single-phase socket, the ADM 260 – 230V version or other models in the Bernardo range in a single-phase configuration are available. The 400V three-phase power supply is standard in Italian joinery and artisan workshops equipped with an industrial meter. The 3.0 kW three-phase motor offers smoother starting torque compared to single-phase motors of similar power, reducing absorption peaks at start-up. Before purchasing, verify with your electrician the presence of a dedicated three-phase line with adequate protection (typically 16A).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum working width for thicknessing?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe effective thicknessing width is 310 mm, with adjustable passage height from 5 to 225 mm. The maximum depth of cut per pass is 5 mm, with 2-3 mm recommended for precision finishing on hardwoods. The 310 mm covers boards, strips, and panels of the most common sizes in Italian joinery: standard interior doors, kitchen countertops, glued laminated timber beams. For panels wider than 310 mm, it is necessary to consider the AD 410 (400 mm) or work in multiple passes by splitting the panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn continuous professional use (4-6 hours\/day), the 4 HSS knives require sharpening every 2-4 weeks on softwoods, every 1-2 weeks on hardwoods. Complete replacement depends on the number of sharpening cycles (typically 5-8 cycles before discarding). The HSS knives for the AD 310 are available as original Bernardo spare parts from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping. The included setting gauge provides precise knife positioning after each replacement, a critical element to avoid surface steps on the planed board.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust extractor is needed for the AD 310?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction port is Ø 100 mm. A dust extractor with a minimum flow rate of 600-800 m³\/h is needed to effectively capture chips in thicknessing mode. Bernardo DC 300 and DC 600 are the manufacturer's recommended solutions. The chip collection hood is foldable and integrated into the machine: during jointing, it can be folded away to avoid obstructing the operator. For enclosed spaces without a fixed dust extraction system, the mobile Bernardo DC 300 (400V) is the most common solution chosen by Krollit customers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install the AD 310 in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,610 × 1,045 × 1,100 mm. For workpiece handling, at least 2.5 m of clear space is needed in front of and behind the machine, for a total operating area of approximately 6.5 × 1.5 m. The alignment tables open at the back of the machine: this feature allows for wall placement on the front side, optimizing space usage in narrow workshops. The 295 kg weight does not require a special foundation. Check access to the workshop (minimum recommended door width 1.2 m).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623943377224,"sku":"08-1064","price":2745.1,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_AD_310_con_tavoli_in_ghisa.jpg?v=1760691823"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-ad-410-400-v","title":"Bernardo AD 410 Planer Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 410 planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 410 mm, a jointer table of 1,685 mm, a Ø 95 mm cutter block with 4 HSS blades rotating at 4,300 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 220 mm, a feed rate of 6 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Manufactured in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit, an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 410 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,685 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 – 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 95 mm – 4 HSS blades – 4,300 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 340 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 410 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 410 is the benchmark combination planer for woodworking shops that process wide workpieces: with a usable width of 410 mm, it handles panels, joinery timber, and glued laminated beams that exceed the limits of 310 mm planers. Its 340 kg structure, 1,685 mm jointer table, and Ø 95 mm cutter block with 4 HSS blades position it in the professional-heavy segment: a machine designed for those who tackle large boards daily, such as joiners, custom furniture makers, and timber framers. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is primarily used for processing solid doors, extra-large kitchen countertops, cladding panels, and beams.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 410 is the version with standard HSS blades in the 410 mm width family. Those looking for lower noise and longer cutting edge life can consider the AD 410 S with a spiral cutter block and TCT inserts (higher range, higher price). The difference compared to the AD 310 (310 mm) is not just in width: the longer table (1,685 vs 1,610 mm) and greater weight (340 vs 295 kg) provide superior stability for large workpieces that require more support during feeding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo AD 410 – 400V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy professional machine (340 kg) with 400V three-phase motor: excessive size and cost for occasional use. For hobbyists with workpieces up to 250 mm, consider the ADM 260 – 230V.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery\/craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor those who frequently work with pieces between 310 and 410 mm wide, doors, panels, beams, this is the most suitable solution. 400V three-phase is the standard in Italian joinery shops.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor intensive cycles over 6 hours\/day on hardwoods, consider the AD 410 S version with a spiral cutter block, which reduces cutting edge wear and lowers noise levels.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a 400V three-phase system; hobbyists with width requirements below 310 mm; environments with access less than 1.3 m wide (mandatory delivery check).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,685 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,300 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 – 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,685 × 1,045 × 1,100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 340 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, limit switch against unintentional restart, cutter block guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 mounted HSS blades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between AD 410 and AD 310?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 410 offers 100 mm more planing width (410 vs 310 mm), a longer jointer table (1,685 vs 1,610 mm), and greater structural weight (340 vs 295 kg). The motor is identical (3.0 kW S1, 4.2 kW S6), as are the feed rate (6 m\/min) and dust extraction connection (Ø 100 mm). The choice depends exclusively on the width of the workpieces being processed: if you regularly exceed 310 mm, the AD 410 is necessary; otherwise, the AD 310 costs less and takes up less space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the AD 410 plane MDF or particle board?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTechnically yes, but with reservations. MDF and particle board panels contain abrasive resins that wear HSS blades much faster than solid wood: the sharpening frequency can double compared to working on natural wood. For those who primarily work on MDF or panels with glues, it is advisable to consider the AD 410 S version with a spiral cutter block and TCT carbide inserts, which offer up to 10-20 times longer cutting edge life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust extractor is needed for the AD 410?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction connection is Ø 100 mm. With a width of 410 mm, chip production is greater than with 310 mm versions: a dust extractor with a minimum flow rate of 800-1,000 m³\/h is recommended. The Bernardo DC 600 (400V, flow rate 1,500 m³\/h) is the recommended solution for continuous professional use with this working width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 4 HSS blades be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day) on medium woods, the 4 HSS blades require sharpening every 2-3 weeks. On hardwoods, the frequency can increase to 1-2 weeks. The blades are available as original Bernardo spare parts from Krollit's warehouse. The supplied setting gauge ensures correct positioning of the 4 blades after each replacement, an operation that takes 15-20 minutes with the gauge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install the AD 410?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,685 × 1,045 × 1,100 mm. For handling wide workpieces up to 410 mm, a clear space of at least 2.5-3 m in front of and behind the machine is required. The jointer tables open at the back: front wall positioning is possible. With 340 kg, it requires a equipped platform for delivery: check access (minimum door width 1.3 m) before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623944327496,"sku":"08-1067","price":3452.72,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_AD_410_400V_professionale.jpg?v=1757347751"},{"product_id":"bernardo-adm-260-230v","title":"Planer Thicknesser Bernardo ADM 260 – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 260 – 230V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,080 mm, a Ø 75 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 3,750 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 190 mm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, and a 2.0 kW single-phase 230V motor with integrated motor brake. Manufactured in Austria, it has been distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,080 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 3,750 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0 kW S1 \/ 2.8 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 160 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ADM 260 – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 260 – 230V is the choice for those looking for a professional 250 mm combination planer-thicknesser without the need for a three-phase power supply. It works with any 230V single-phase industrial socket, a decisive feature for small carpentry shops, craft workshops in non-industrial premises, and advanced hobbyists with a home workshop. The cast iron tables with sound-absorbing lips distinguish this machine from the entry-level AD 260 – 400V: they reduce vibrations transmitted to the workpiece surface and lower the noise level during processing, a concrete advantage in shared workspaces or residential areas. The integrated motor brake stops the shaft in a few seconds after shutdown, increasing operational safety.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 260 – 230V is positioned as a premium single-phase version compared to the AD 260 – 400V: same working width (250 mm), but improved tables with sound-absorbing lips and a motor brake. Those who already have a three-phase system in their workshop should prefer the AD 260 – 400V for its more consistent motor torque; those working with single-phase power have no alternatives in the Bernardo 250 mm range until the ADM 260 S – 230V with spiral cutter block (higher range).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo ADM 260 – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorks with a 230V single-phase socket: no three-phase system required. The 160 kg weight is manageable in a home workshop with a pallet truck. 250 mm capacity covers most hobby projects.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops without a three-phase system, it's the professional 250 mm solution. Tables with sound-absorbing lips and a motor brake increase quality and safety in daily use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 2.0 kW single-phase motor is not sized for industrial cycles on hardwoods. For intensive production, consider the ADM 300 – 400V three-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops with an existing three-phase system (prefer AD 260 – 400V for higher motor torque); working on pieces wider than 250 mm; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 4 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS 18%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3,750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 × 145 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0 kW (2.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 kW (3.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor brake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction outlet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,100 × 750 × 1,110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated motor brake, switch with undervoltage release, cutter block guard, anti-restart lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 HSS 18% knives fitted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwitch with motor brake\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I connect the ADM 260 – 230V to a normal household socket?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 260 – 230V operates on 230V single-phase power, but requires an industrial CEE 16A socket, not a standard Schuko household socket. The starting current of a 2.0 kW motor can reach 8-10A for a short moment: a dedicated line with a 16A miniature circuit breaker is the recommended configuration to avoid tripping the electrical system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between ADM 260 – 230V and AD 260 – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 260 – 230V operates on 230V single-phase, has tables with sound-absorbing lips, an integrated motor brake, and a feed rate of 8 m\/min. The AD 260 – 400V requires 400V three-phase, has standard tables without sound absorption, and a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min. For those with three-phase power available, the AD 260 – 400V offers more uniform motor torque under load. For those working with single-phase power, the ADM 260 – 230V is the mandatory choice at this capacity level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the maximum depth of cut of 1.8 mm for thicknessing a significant limitation?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn standard professional use, no. Finishing passes typically range from 0.5 to 1.5 mm, well within the 1.8 mm limit. Only those performing aggressive roughing in initial processing might feel the limit: in that case, it is more appropriate to use the jointer mode (max depth of cut 5 mm) for initial roughing, reserving thicknessing for finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre HSS knives suitable for all types of wood?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHSS 18% knives are suitable for softwoods (pine, spruce, poplar), medium woods (cherry, European walnut, birch), and compact hardwoods (oak, ash). For very hard or resinous exotic woods (teak, iroko) or panels with MDF glue, more frequent sharpening checks are recommended. For those working predominantly on MDF or abrasive materials, Bernardo offers versions with a spiral cutter block and TCT inserts (model ADM 260 S) with significantly longer lifespan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install the ADM 260 in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,100 × 750 × 1,110 mm. For handling workpieces, at least 1.8 m of clear space is needed in front and behind, for an operating area of approximately 4.5 × 1.2 m. At 160 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet truck on a flat floor. It is among the most compact professional combination planer-thicknessers in the Bernardo range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623945146696,"sku":"08-1030","price":1281.05,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_ADM_260_con_tavoli_in_ghisa.jpg?v=1760519556"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-adm-300-v-400v","title":"Bernardo ADM 300 V Planer and Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 300 V jointer-planer offers a planing width of 305 mm, a 1,510 mm jointer table, a Ø 78 mm cutter block with 4 HSS knives running at 5,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 220 mm, variable feed speed of 1–10 m\/min with a digital display, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Manufactured in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 305 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,510 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 – 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 78 mm – 4 HSS knives – 5,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1–10 m\/min variable (digital display)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 280 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ADM 300 V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 300 V is the advanced version of the ADM 300: it adds a variable feed speed from 1 to 10 m\/min adjustable via a digital display, which allows the feed speed to be adapted to the type of wood, depth of cut, and required finish. For hardwoods or difficult grain, the speed is reduced to minimize tear-out and increase surface quality; for roughing softwoods, it is set to maximum to reduce processing time. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by furniture makers and window\/door manufacturers who work with a wide variety of wood species, from pine to oak, and who value operational flexibility compared to a machine with fixed feed speed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 300 V occupies the upper end of the ADM 300 family: same structure, same cutter block, same motor, but with the variable feed system as the main differentiator. Compared to the standard ADM 300 (fixed feed speed 6.6 m\/min), the V is preferable for those who work with very different types of wood on the same day. For those who always work with the same type of wood with consistent passes, the standard ADM 300 is sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo ADM 300 V – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy professional machine (280 kg, three-phase 400V) with advanced features not necessary for occasional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe variable feed is the main added value: it allows optimizing quality and productivity based on the type of wood processed during the day.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor productions with a variety of wood species and different finish requirements, the variable feed with digital display is a concrete quality control tool.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a three-phase 400V system; those who always work with the same type of wood with fixed parameters (standard ADM 300 is sufficient and less expensive); pieces wider than 305 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,510 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e915 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 78 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJointer fence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,105 × 155 mm – inclinable 90°–45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 – 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e585 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1–10 m\/min variable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,700 × 790 × 1,080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 280 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, cutter block protection, anti-restart lockout\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated trolley\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display for thicknesser table\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContinuously adjustable feed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the concrete difference between fixed and variable feed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith fixed feed (standard ADM 300: 6.6 m\/min), the workpiece feed speed is constant regardless of the wood and depth of cut. With variable feed (ADM 300 V: 1–10 m\/min), you can set 2-3 m\/min for hard oak for a perfect finish, and increase to 8-10 m\/min for roughing pine to maximize productivity. The digital display shows the set speed and allows you to reproduce the same settings for subsequent work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the ADM 300 V also suitable for production on exotic woods?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The ability to reduce the feed to 1-2 m\/min makes it suitable for dense exotic woods like teak (density ~680 kg\/m³) or ipe (~1,000 kg\/m³), where high speeds can cause fiber tear-out. With passes of 0.5-1 mm and slow feed, the ADM 300 V produces surface quality comparable to higher-end machines. Note: on siliceous woods like teak, HSS knife wear is accelerated; consider the version with a spiral cutter block and TCT inserts for intensive production on these materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the feed adjusted on the digital display?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe digital display is integrated into the machine's control panel and shows the current feed speed in m\/min. Adjustment is done via a potentiometer or digital keypad (check the specific model's manual). The setting is retained even after the machine is switched off, allowing you to resume work with the previous parameters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between ADM 300 V and standard ADM 300?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe only difference is the feed system: variable 1–10 m\/min with a digital display in the V version, fixed at 6.6 m\/min in the standard version. Structure, cutter block, motor, dimensions, and weight are identical. The price of the V version is higher due to the electronic feed adjustment system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,700 × 790 × 1,080 mm. For workpiece handling, a clear space of at least 2.5 m in front and behind is needed. The integrated trolley allows internal movement on a flat floor without additional equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623947243848,"sku":"08-1087A","price":2549.89,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_ADM_300_V_400V_professionale.jpg?v=1757347075"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-fs-410-n-400v","title":"Bernardo FS 410 N Planer and Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 410 N jointer-planer offers a planing width of 405 mm, a 1,640 mm jointer table, a Ø 70 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 5,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 230 mm, a feed rate of 7 m\/min, and a 4.0 kW S1 \/ 5.5 kW S6 three-phase 400V motor with a digital display included. Manufactured in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 405 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,640 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 70 mm – 3 HSS knives – 5,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 7 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.0 kW S1 \/ 5.5 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 255 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the FS 410 N and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 410 N is the professional 405 mm combination planer in the FS family, the one with a standard HSS knife block. With a 4.0 kW S1 and 5.5 kW S6 motor, it is the most powerful among Bernardo combination planers in the 400 mm range with HSS knives, and the only one in this width to have a Ø 120 mm dust extraction port (vs Ø 100 mm for smaller versions): a technical detail that indicates a higher chip production volume and the need for a larger extraction system. The digital display for the thicknessing table is included as standard. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is primarily used for the production of solid doors, cladding panels, tables, and other wide solid wood elements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe FS 410 N is superior to the AD 410 (same format, smaller 3.0 kW motor, no display) in terms of power and cutter block speed (5,500 vs 4,300 rpm). For those looking for 405 mm with HSS knives but less intensive use, the AD 410 is sufficient. For those working large pieces in intensive cycles on hard woods, the FS 410 N is the appropriate choice in the HSS range. The next step is the spiral cutter block version (FS 410 PS) for those who want to almost completely eliminate the sharpening operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo FS 410 N – 400V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy professional machine with a 4.0 kW three-phase motor. Oversized dimensions and cost for occasional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor those who work wide pieces up to 405 mm professionally. The 4.0 kW motor provides sufficient torque even on hard woods in continuous cycles.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor intensive production of large formats, consider the FS 410 PS with a spiral cutter block, which drastically reduces cutting edge maintenance times.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a 400V three-phase system; pieces with a width less than 310 mm (oversized machine); those who do not have a dust extractor with a Ø 120 mm connection or adapter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSurfacing planer (jointer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e405 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,640 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,100 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknessing planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e405 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.0 kW (5.5 hp)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.5 kW (7.5 hp)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,650 × 1,000 × 1,000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 255 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, cutter block guard, anti-restart lockout\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display for thicknessing table\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhy is the dust extraction port Ø 120 mm instead of Ø 100 mm?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith a working width of 405 mm, the volume of chips produced per advanced meter is about 30% higher than a 310 mm planer. The Ø 120 mm port allows this volume to be disposed of without reducing airflow and without obstructions. If you only have extractors with a Ø 100 mm hose, you can use a reducer, but the effective flow rate is reduced by 20-30%: sufficient for intermittent use, not optimal for intensive continuous cycles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between FS 410 N and AD 410?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe FS 410 N has a more powerful motor (4.0 kW S1 vs 3.0 kW), higher cutter block speed (5,500 vs 4,300 rpm), greater thicknessing depth of cut (4 vs 5 mm), Ø 120 mm dust extraction port (vs 100 mm), and digital display as standard. The AD 410 has 4 HSS knives (vs 3 for the FS 410 N) and weighs slightly more (340 vs 255 kg). For intensive professional use, the FS 410 N is superior; for less intensive use, the AD 410 is sufficient at a lower cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre 3 HSS knives sufficient compared to the 4 of the AD 410?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSurface quality depends on the number of cuts per advanced meter, not just the number of knives. With 3 knives at 5,500 rpm and a feed rate of 7 m\/min, the FS 410 N produces approximately 39 cuts per cm advanced. With 4 knives at 4,300 rpm and 6 m\/min, the AD 410 produces approximately 29 cuts per cm. The FS 410 N therefore produces theoretically superior surface finish, despite having one less knife.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn continuous professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium woods, the 3 HSS knives require sharpening every 2-3 weeks. The high cutter block speed (5,500 rpm) produces higher quality but also greater edge wear compared to slower cutter blocks. Knives are available as original Bernardo spare parts from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed for the FS 410 N in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,650 × 1,000 × 1,000 mm. With a working width of 405 mm, a clear space of at least 2.5-3 m in front and behind is needed for handling larger pieces. At 255 kg, delivery is on a pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623948161352,"sku":"08-1059","price":2549.89,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_FS_410_N_400_V.jpg?v=1757017064"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-pt-310-400v","title":"Planer and thicknesser Bernardo PT 310 – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 310 planer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 310 mm, a 1,300 mm surface planer table, a Ø 75 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives rotating at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 180 mm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, and a 2.2 kW three-phase 400V motor. Produced in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (surface):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSurface planer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 180 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.2 kW S1 \/ 3.0 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 180 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 310 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 310 – 400V is the 310 mm combination planer\/thicknesser in the compact and lightweight version of the PT range: at 180 kg, it is significantly more manageable than the AD 310 (295 kg) and the ADM 300 (280 kg), though it has a shorter surface planer table (1,300 mm vs 1,500-1,610 mm) and a smaller motor (2.2 kW vs 3.0 kW). It is the choice for those who need 310 mm width but work in tight spaces or need to move the machine, or for those with less intensive planing needs. Its 8 m\/min feed rate, higher than the AD 310 (6 m\/min), makes it more productive for roughing operations on softwoods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the PT range, the PT 310 is positioned as the 310 mm entry-level model: above the PT 260 (260 mm, 2.2 kW motor) and below the PT 305 D (305 mm, more powerful motor, digital display). The main limitation compared to the AD 310 is the reduced thicknessing height of 180 mm (vs 225 mm): for those who frequently work with pieces between 180 and 225 mm high, the AD 310 is necessary, for everyone else, the PT 310 is sufficient at a lower cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 310 – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequires three-phase 400V. For hobby use with single-phase outlets, consider 230V versions in the PT range. The 180 kg is manageable with a pallet jack.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm width with compact structure (180 kg, 1,300 × 900 mm footprint). Suitable for workshops with limited space working with pieces up to 180 mm high.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 2.2 kW S1 motor and 1,300 mm table are not sized for intensive industrial cycles. Consider the AD 310 or ADM 300.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with a height exceeding 180 mm in thicknessing (consider AD 310 with a pass-through of up to 225 mm); workshops without a three-phase 400V system; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 4 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSurface Planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e990 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePass-through height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,300 × 900 × 1,180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 180 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and Safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, cutter block guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwitch-plug combination\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 310 and AD 310?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 310 weighs 180 kg (vs 295 kg for the AD 310), has a shorter surface planer table (1,300 vs 1,610 mm), a smaller motor (2.2 kW vs 3.0 kW), and reduced thicknessing height (180 vs 225 mm). However, the feed rate is faster (8 vs 6 m\/min). The PT 310 is suitable for those seeking 310 mm width in a compact and lightweight format; the AD 310 is superior for intensive use, tall workpieces, and structural stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I thickness plane pieces up to 200 mm high?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The maximum thicknessing height for the PT 310 is 180 mm. For pieces between 180 and 225 mm high, you need to consider the AD 310 (pass-through up to 225 mm) or the ADM 300 (up to 220 mm). For pieces up to 180 mm, the PT 310 is perfectly adequate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 8 m\/min feed rate also suitable for hardwoods?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn hardwoods (oak, ash) with an 8 m\/min feed rate, it is advisable to reduce the depth of cut to 1-1.5 mm to avoid tear-out and motor overload. On softwoods (pine, spruce), the full 8 m\/min feed rate with 2-2.5 mm passes is perfectly feasible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow does the changeover from surface planer to thicknesser work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe surfacing tables open with a hinge to expose the thicknesser bed: the operation takes approximately 30-60 seconds without tools. The dust hood is integrated and automatically adjusts to both modes. It is not necessary to disconnect the dust collector during mode change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space does the PT 310 need in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,300 × 900 × 1,180 mm: among the most compact 310 mm planers available. For moving workpieces, a clear space of at least 2 m in front and behind is needed. At 180 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet truck on a level floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623948947784,"sku":"08-1041","price":1976.47,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_PT_310_400V.jpg?v=1757346272"},{"product_id":"adh-250-p-400-v","title":"Bernardo ADH 250 P Planer Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADH 250 P – 400V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,090 mm, a Ø 75 mm shaft with 3 HSS blades at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 185 mm, a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min, and a 1.5 kW three-phase 400V motor. It weighs 148 kg and has dimensions of 1,100 × 750 × 1,010 mm. Manufactured in Austria, it is distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,090 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 185 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaner shaft:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS blades – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 kW S1 \/ 2.1 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 148 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ADH 250 P and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADH 250 P – 400V is the most compact and lightweight combined jointer-thicknesser in Bernardo's professional range with a 250 mm width in its three-phase version. At 148 kg, it is 25 kg lighter than the AD 260 – 400V (173 kg) and significantly more compact (dimensions 1,100 × 750 mm vs 1,150 × 800 mm). The 1.5 kW motor places it in the entry-level segment: suitable for workshops with limited planing needs, where the 250 mm width and low weight are the main selection criteria. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is primarily used as a first machine by carpenters starting their business, or as a support planer in workshops already equipped with a main machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADH 250 P occupies the lowest end of Bernardo's three-phase combined planer range at 250 mm: 1.5 kW motor vs 2.0 kW for the AD 260 – 400V, jointing depth up to 5 mm (vs 3 mm for the AD 260), thicknessing height up to 185 mm (vs similar 185 mm). The main difference from the AD 260 is the smaller motor: sufficient for intermittent use and soft-medium woods, more limiting for intensive cycles on hardwoods. For those who can invest slightly more, the AD 260 – 400V offers a more appropriately sized motor for daily professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo ADH 250 P – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequires a 400V three-phase system not available in home workshops. For hobby use in single-phase, consider the ADM 260 – 230V.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops with limited planing needs (2-4 hours\/day) on soft and medium woods. The 1.5 kW motor is sufficient for non-intensive use at 250 mm.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.5 kW S1 motor is not sized for industrial cycles on hardwoods. Consider the AD 260 – 400V (2.0 kW) or ADM 300 – 400V (3.0 kW).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a 400V three-phase system (choose ADM 260 – 230V); pieces over 250 mm wide or over 185 mm high for thicknessing; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 3 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (Planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e830 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaner shaft – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e715 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e245 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.1 kW (2.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,100 × 750 × 1,010 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e148 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, planer shaft protection, anti-restart interlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS blades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 feed handles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between ADH 250 P and AD 260 – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADH 250 P has a 1.5 kW S1 motor (vs 2.0 kW for the AD 260), weighs 148 kg (vs 173 kg), has a slightly more compact footprint, and a jointing depth of up to 5 mm (vs 3 mm for the AD 260). The AD 260 has a faster feed rate (same 4.8 m\/min) but a more powerful motor for more intensive daily professional use. For intermittent use, the ADH 250 P is sufficient; for joinery workshops with 4-8 hour shifts, the AD 260 – 400V is the more suitable choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 1.5 kW motor sufficient for professional work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the intensity of use and the type of wood. For softwoods (pine, fir, poplar) with passes of 1-2 mm, the 1.5 kW motor is sufficient for continuous cycles of 3-4 hours. For hardwoods (oak, ash), it is recommended to reduce the depth of cut to 0.5-1 mm and take breaks every 30-45 minutes to prevent motor overheating. For daily professional use on hardwoods, the AD 260 – 400V with a 2.0 kW motor is preferable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you switch from jointer to thicknesser?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe alignment tables pivot on hinges to expose the thicknesser bed. The two supplied handles facilitate manual flipping of the tables. The operation takes about 30-60 seconds without tools. The Ø 100 mm dust extraction port remains accessible in both working modes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use the ADH 250 P to plane particle board or MDF?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot recommended for frequent use. Particle board and MDF contain resins and abrasives that wear HSS knives much faster than solid wood. On these materials, the sharpening frequency can increase by 50-100%. For those who primarily work with panels, consider versions with a helical cutter block and TCT inserts available in other machines in the Bernardo range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install the ADH 250 P?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,100 × 750 × 1,010 mm, among the most compact in Bernardo's professional combined planer range. For moving workpieces, a clear space of at least 1.8 m in front and behind is needed. At 148 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack. Delivery is on a standard pallet, no special lifting equipment required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50623950258504,"sku":"08-1019A","price":1196.86,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_ADH_250_P_400V_compatta.jpg?v=1757348634"},{"product_id":"carpenter-set-3-pezzi","title":"Bernardo Hand Planer – 3-piece Set","description":"\u003cp\u003eSet of 3 Bernardo hand planes for manual woodworking: roughing, finishing, and corner trimming. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eContents:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 hand planes of different sizes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUse:\u003c\/strong\u003e roughing, finishing, manual woodworking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e Bernardo\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhen this set is needed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHand planes remain essential tools in woodworking for operations that machines cannot perform: in-situ finishing on already assembled pieces, correcting edges and surfaces in hard-to-reach spots with an electric planer, working on small pieces where the use of a machine would be dangerous or impractical. The set of 3 covers basic needs: a short plane for roughing and material removal, a medium plane for general leveling, and a long (or specific) plane for joints and extended surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho this set is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eComplete set for common manual operations without having to purchase each plane separately.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan carpenter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUseful as a set of manual tools complementing machines, for in-situ finishing and corrections.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial use requires electric planers or CNC machines. Hand planes are finishing and correction tools.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 Bernardo hand planes of different sizes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the sizes of the 3 planes included in the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes planes of different sizes to cover the main manual woodworking operations. For the exact sizes of the individual planes included in the set, please contact Krollit: configurations may vary based on manufacturer availability. Krollit, as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007, has access to updated catalog specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the blades replaceable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Bernardo hand planes are fitted with replaceable and re-sharpenable hardened steel blades. For blade replacement and compatible accessories, please contact Krollit; original Bernardo spare parts are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the 3-piece set and the 5-piece set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-piece set includes 2 additional planes compared to the 3-piece set, covering a wider range of specialized operations. If manual planes are complementary rather than primary tools in the workshop, the 3-piece set is sufficient for most operations; the 5-piece set is preferable for those who use hand planes as primary tools or work on a wider variety of profiles and surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692450550088,"sku":"14-1040","price":139.42,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_mano_-_Set_da_3_pezzi.jpg?v=1750786133"},{"product_id":"carpenter-set-5-pezzi","title":"Bernardo Hand Planer - 5-piece set","description":"\u003cp\u003eBernardo 5-piece hand plane set for comprehensive manual woodworking: roughing, finishing, corner trimming, profiles, and curved surfaces. Distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eContents:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 hand planes of different sizes and types\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUse:\u003c\/strong\u003e roughing, finishing, profiles, corners, curved surfaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e Bernardo\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhen the complete 5-piece set is needed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-piece hand plane set covers the entire range of manual woodworking operations: in addition to the standard roughing and finishing operations of the 3-piece set, it adds tools for contoured profiles, internal corners, and irregularly shaped surfaces. It is the choice for those who use hand planes as primary tools in the production process, restorers, cabinetmakers, luthiers, where the variety of tools makes a difference in the final quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is this set for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eComplete set but potentially oversized for those who use hand planes occasionally. Consider the 3-piece set if needs are limited.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinetmaker \/ restorer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 5 planes cover profiles, internal corners, and curved surfaces necessary for quality restoration and cabinetmaking.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan carpenter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eComplete set for those who regularly combine manual work with electric machinery, covering all finishing operations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 Bernardo hand planes of different sizes and types\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat types of planes are included in the 5-piece set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-piece set typically includes planes of different lengths and configurations to cover roughing, flat finishing, corner finishing, profiles, and curved surfaces. For the exact composition of the set, please contact Krollit: configurations may vary based on the availability of the updated Bernardo catalog.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the 3-piece and 5-piece set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-piece set includes 2 additional planes compared to the 3-piece set, designed for more specialized work such as contoured profiles and internal corners. For those who use hand planes primarily for finishing and corrections on machine-worked pieces, the 3-piece set is sufficient. The 5-piece set is preferable for those who work manually on a wide variety of shapes and profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the blades replaceable and re-sharpenable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The hardened steel blades of Bernardo planes are replaceable and re-sharpenable. Original spare parts are available from Krollit's warehouse with 3-5 business day shipping. For precision sharpening of blades, Bernardo produces specific sharpening machines for bench tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692452352328,"sku":"14-1041","price":167.23,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_mano_-_Set_da_5_pezzi.jpg?v=1750786026"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-con-albero-a-spirale-ad-260-s-230v","title":"Bernardo AD 260 S - 230V Planer Thicknesser with Spiral Cutterblock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 S – 230V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,090 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 75 mm with 24 TCT inserts at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 185 mm, a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min, and a 2.0 kW single-phase 230V motor. Noise reduction up to 50% compared to HSS knives. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 75 mm – 24 TCT inserts – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 185 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0 kW S1 \/ 2.8 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise reduction:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 50% vs HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 173 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 260 S – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 S – 230V is the spiral cutterblock version of the AD 260 in a single-phase configuration: it combines the advantages of the TCT cutterblock, reduced noise, up to 20 times longer lifespan, and maintenance through single insert replacement, with the practicality of single-phase 230V power supply, which does not require a three-phase system. In Krollit customer workshops, it is primarily chosen by artisans and carpenters who work in environments where noise levels are a critical factor (shared workshops, residential areas, carpentry schools) or who want to almost completely eliminate knife sharpening from their maintenance routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpiral cutterblock vs HSS knives: the practical difference\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith HSS knives, professional use requires sharpening every 1-4 weeks. With the TCT spiral cutterblock, each insert has 4 cutting edges: when one cutting edge wears out, the insert is rotated 90° to expose a fresh cutting edge, a 2-minute operation with an Allen key, without disassembling the cutterblock. Complete replacement of an insert only occurs when all 4 cutting edges are worn out, with a maintenance frequency 10-20 times lower than HSS knives. The 24 inserts always work in a staggered sequence, eliminating the harmonic vibrations that produce the characteristic noise of straight-knife planers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo AD 260 S – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase 230V, 173 kg, reduced noise: suitable for home workshops with neighbours. Minimum maintenance thanks to reversible TCT inserts.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops without a three-phase system that want to eliminate sharpening from their routine. Reduced noise is a tangible advantage in 8 hours of daily work.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 2.0 kW single-phase motor is not sized for intensive industrial cycles. Consider the AD 260 S – 400V three-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops with an existing three-phase system (consider AD 260 S – 400V for higher motor torque); pieces over 250 mm wide; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 4 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e835 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 pcs reversible (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e715 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0 kW (2.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 kW (3.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 173 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, anti-kickback rollers, cutterblock guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterblock with 24 TCT inserts installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 spare TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you replace a worn TCT insert?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReplacing a TCT insert requires an Allen key (included) and about 2 minutes per insert. There is no need to disassemble the cutterblock or send the machine for service. Procedure: switch off the machine, lock the cutterblock, unscrew the insert screw with the Allen key, rotate the insert 90° to expose the fresh cutting edge (or replace it if all 4 cutting edges are worn), screw it back in, and resume work. The 24 TCT inserts of the AD 260 S each have 4 usable cutting edges before replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the spiral cutterblock also work on resinous woods like pine?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, and with superior results to HSS knives. The geometry of the spiral TCT inserts produces a smoother surface on resinous woods due to the progressive cutting angle that reduces fiber tear-out. Resin tends to build up on the inserts more quickly than with hardwood: periodic cleaning with a specific solvent (every 2-3 weeks with intensive use) maintains optimal cutting performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between AD 260 S – 230V and ADM 260 S – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 260 S – 230V has a cutterblock with 24 TCT inserts and a 1,090 mm jointer table. The ADM 260 S – 230V has a spiral cutterblock with 24 HM inserts, a table with sound-absorbing lips, a prismatic guide, and a thicknessing table guided on a central column, superior construction features that make it more suitable for intensive professional use. The price difference reflects the higher construction level of the ADM.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should TCT inserts be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach TCT insert has 4 cutting edges. In professional use on medium woods (4-6 hours\/day), a cutting edge rotation is necessary every 4-8 weeks per insert. Complete insert replacement occurs when all 4 cutting edges are worn out, every 4-8 months in professional use. Compared to HSS knives which require sharpening every 1-4 weeks, maintenance is drastically reduced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm. For moving workpieces, a clear space of at least 1.8 m in front and behind is needed. At 173 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack. Delivery is on a standard pallet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692573364552,"sku":"08-1053","price":1781.26,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_AD_260_S_Pialla_filo_e_spessore_250_mm_con_albero_a_spirale_400_V.jpg?v=1757520445"},{"product_id":"bernardo-ad-260-s-400v","title":"Bernardo AD 260 S - 400V Planer Thicknesser with Spiral Cutterblock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 S – 400V jointer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,090 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 75 mm with 24 TCT inserts at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 185 mm, a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min, and a 2.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Noise reduction up to 50%. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 75 mm – 24 TCT inserts – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 185 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0 kW S1 \/ 2.8 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise reduction:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 50% vs HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 173 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 260 S – 400V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 S – 400V is the spiral cutterblock version of the AD 260 in a three-phase configuration: for those who already have a three-phase system in their workshop and are willing to invest slightly more than the standard AD 260 HSS to eliminate knife sharpening from routine maintenance. The 2.0 kW three-phase motor offers a smoother starting torque than the single-phase version, with lower absorption peaks on the power line. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by joinery shops that work long shifts on mixed woods, where the versatility of TCT inserts on any type of wood, from softwoods to hardwoods, reduces machine downtime for maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAD 260 S – 400V vs AD 260 S – 230V: when to choose three-phase\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two versions have identical technical specifications (same width, same cutterblock, same weight). The difference is exclusively in the power supply: the 400V three-phase offers more uniform motor torque under load and lower peak absorption, appreciable advantages in prolonged work cycles on hardwoods. For those with available three-phase power, the 400V is the natural choice; for those without three-phase power, the 230V is the corresponding version.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Bernardo AD 260 S – 400V is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequires a 400V three-phase system. For hobby use without three-phase, prefer the 230V version. The TCT cutterblock is also appreciated in occasional use due to almost no maintenance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops with 400V three-phase that want to eliminate sharpening from their routine. On mixed woods, TCT offers consistent quality without adapting maintenance frequency to the type of wood.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor intensive cycles, consider the ADM 260 S – 400V with superior construction. The AD 260 S – 400V is suitable for shifts up to 6-7 hours on medium woods.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a three-phase system (choose AD 260 S – 230V); pieces over 250 mm wide; intensive production on very hard woods over 7 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e835 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 pcs reversible (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e715 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0 kW (2.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 kW (3.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 173 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, anti-kickback rollers, cutterblock guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterblock with 24 TCT inserts installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 spare TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhy choose the 400V version over the 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith an available three-phase system, the 400V version offers more uniform motor torque under load, fewer cutterblock speed fluctuations during passes on hardwoods, and lower peak absorption on the line. In practice: less interference with other users of the system during startup, more linear performance in intensive work. If three-phase is not available, the 230V version is the only viable option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the 24 TCT inserts on the AD 260 S the same as on the AD 310 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The AD 260 S uses a Ø 75 mm cutterblock with 24 TCT inserts; the AD 310 S uses a Ø 95 mm cutterblock with 52 TCT inserts. The inserts are not interchangeable between the two models. However, the geometry of the inserts is standardized: the TCT spare parts available from Krollit are compatible with the respective cutterblock of each model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the maintenance of TCT inserts managed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach insert has 4 cutting edges. When the surface quality noticeably declines, the insert is rotated 90° with an hex key: a 2-minute operation, no special tools, no need for sharpening. Complete replacement of the insert occurs when all 4 cutting edges are worn out. With 24 inserts on the cutterblock, they are rarely replaced all at once: maintenance is progressive, insert by insert, without ever stopping production for an entire day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the AD 260 S work well on MDF and panels with glue?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, much better than HSS knives. The TCT carbide inserts resist the abrasive resins of MDF much longer than HSS high-speed steel. On MDF, the frequency of insert rotation may increase compared to solid wood, but it remains significantly lower than the frequency of HSS sharpening. For production mainly on MDF or particleboard, the version with a TCT spiral cutterblock is the correct choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm. For handling workpieces, at least 1.8 m of free space is needed in front and behind. At 173 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692574740808,"sku":"08-1054","price":1781.26,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_AD_260_S_Pialla_filo_e_spessore_250_mm_con_albero_a_spirale_400_V.jpg?v=1757520445"},{"product_id":"bernardo-ad-310s-spirale-400v","title":"Bernardo AD 310 S Planer Thicknesser – 400V with spiral cutter block","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 310 S – 400V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 310 mm, a jointer table of 1,610 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 95 mm with 52 TCT inserts at 4,300 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 225 mm, a feed rate of 6 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. It provides up to 50% noise reduction and a cutting edge life up to 20 times longer than HSS knives. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 95 mm – 52 TCT inserts – 4,300 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 225 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise reduction:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 50% vs HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 295 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 310 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 310 S is the spiral cutterblock version of the AD 310: same structure, same motor, same weight, but with 52 TCT inserts instead of 4 HSS knives. The choice between AD 310 and AD 310 S depends almost exclusively on the frequency of maintenance desired: those who consider knife sharpening an acceptable routine choose the lower-cost AD 310; those who want to almost completely eliminate machine downtime for cutting edge maintenance choose the AD 310 S. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by joineries with 6-8 hour shifts on mixed woods, where the time spent on traditional sharpening impacts productivity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e52 TCT inserts: why so many\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ø 95 mm cutterblock of the AD 310 S holds 52 inserts in a helical, staggered arrangement: each insert cuts only a small section of the workpiece per rotation, with a progressive entry angle that eliminates harmonic vibrations. The result is a surface with superior cutting fineness compared to straight knives, less tear-out on oblique grain, and a significantly lower noise level, measurable at 10-15 dB less than the HSS version. Each insert has 4 cutting edges: when one edge wears out, it is rotated by 90°.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo AD 310 S – 400V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy professional machine (295 kg, three-phase). For hobby use, TCT is appreciated for minimal maintenance, but the cost is higher than the AD 310 HSS.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe time saved on cutting edge maintenance recoups the additional investment compared to the AD 310 HSS in about 12-18 months of professional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor 6-8 hour shifts, TCT virtually eliminates downtime for sharpening. For even more intensive production, consider the ADM 300 with a helical roller.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a 400V three-phase system; those who primarily work with straight knives and prefer not to change technology; workpieces over 310 mm wide (consider AD 410 S).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,610 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e910 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e52 reversible pcs (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,300 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 225 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction outlet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,610 × 900 × 1,150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e295 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, cutterblock guard, anti-restart lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterblock with 52 mounted TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 spare TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push block\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSetting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between AD 310 and AD 310 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 310 mounts 4 HSS knives on the Ø 95 mm cutterblock. The AD 310 S mounts 52 TCT inserts on the same cutterblock. Structure, motor, dimensions, and weight are identical. TCT offers: approx. 50% noise reduction, 10-20 times longer cutting edge life, maintenance by rotation\/individual replacement without disassembling the cutterblock. The cost of the AD 310 S is higher; the time saved in maintenance recoups it in 12-18 months of full-shift professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWith 52 inserts, is replacement complicated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The inserts are not replaced all at once. In normal use, 1-3 inserts are dealt with at a time, those in the most stressed positions. The procedure is identical regardless of the number of inserts: hex key, 2 minutes per insert, no cutterblock disassembly. The 52 inserts mean more cutting points distributed on the cutterblock, higher surface quality, not greater maintenance complexity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the AD 310 S work on all wood types?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, with superior results to the HSS version on almost all woods. Particularly appreciated on: hard woods with difficult grain (oak, ash, walnut) where the helical cut reduces tear-out; resinous woods (pine, larch) where resin accumulates less on TCT inserts than on HSS knives; MDF and panels with glues where TCT lasts 10-20 times longer than HSS. On very exotic and siliceous woods, TCT insert wear is faster than usual but remains manageable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust extractor is needed for the AD 310 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction outlet is Ø 100 mm. With a 310 mm width, a dust extractor with a minimum airflow of 600-800 m³\/h is needed. The spiral cutterblock produces chips of a different shape than straight knives, smaller and more homogeneous, which are easily extracted even with medium-capacity systems. Bernardo DC 300 and DC 600 are compatible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,610 × 900 × 1,150 mm. For moving workpieces, clear space of at least 2.5 m in front and behind is needed. At 295 kg, adequate means for unloading are required: check access (minimum door width 1.2 m).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692575723848,"sku":"08-1066","price":3391.71,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_AD_310_S_con_albero_a_spirale_e_inserti_TCT.jpg?v=1760689970"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-con-albero-a-spirale-ad-410-s-400-v","title":"Planer and Thicknesser Bernardo AD 410 S – 400V with spiral cutterblock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 410 S – 400V jointer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 410 mm, a jointer table of 1,685 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 95 mm with 72 TCT inserts at 4,300 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 220 mm, a feed rate of 6 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Noise reduction up to 50%, cutting edge life up to 20 times longer than HSS knives. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 410 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 95 mm – 72 TCT inserts – 4,300 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 – 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise reduction:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 50% vs HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 340 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 410 S and for what purpose?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 410 S is the 410 mm combined planer with a TCT spiral cutterblock: the choice for woodworking shops that professionally process wide workpieces and want to eliminate machine downtime for sharpening. The 72 inserts on the Ø 95 mm cutterblock, the highest density in the AD range, offer superior surface quality compared to the HSS version on any wood type, with a measured noise level of approx. 10-15 dB lower. In Krollit customer workshops, it is predominantly used by window and door manufacturers and furniture makers who work on wide doors, panels, and beams in full shifts, where cutting edge maintenance time is a real cost to productivity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e72 inserts vs 52 inserts: when the AD 410 S vs the AD 310 S\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe difference is not only in width (410 vs 310 mm) but also in the density of inserts on the cutterblock: the AD 410 S has 72 TCT inserts compared to 52 on the AD 310 S. More inserts on a greater width mean a more even distribution of the cutting load, with less stress on each individual insert and consistent surface quality even on large workpieces. The choice between AD 310 S and AD 410 S depends exclusively on the maximum width of the workpieces being processed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with shipping in 3-5 working days. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo AD 410 S – 400V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy professional machine (340 kg, three-phase). Cost and dimensions oversized for occasional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall woodworking shop \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor those who work with wide workpieces up to 410 mm and want to eliminate cutting edge maintenance from their routine. TCT is particularly advantageous for doors and panels where surface quality is critical.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor intensive production of wide workpieces, TCT is the correct choice. For extreme cycles over 8 hours\/day on hard woods, also consider the FS 410 PS with a more powerful motor.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a three-phase 400V system; workpieces with a width less than 310 mm (oversized); environments with access less than 1.3 m wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSurface planer (jointer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,685 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72 reversible pieces (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,300 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning fence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 – 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,685 × 1,045 × 1,100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, planer cutterblock guard, anti-restart lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterblock with 72 TCT inserts mounted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 spare TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSetting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between AD 410 and AD 410 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 410 uses 4 HSS knives on the Ø 95 mm cutterblock. The AD 410 S uses 72 TCT inserts on the same cutterblock. Structure, motor, dimensions, and weight are identical. The advantage of TCT: noise reduced by approx. 50%, cutting edge life 10-20 times longer, maintenance by rotating the insert without disassembly. The cost of the AD 410 S is higher; the payback period is 12-18 months of professional full-shift use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre 72 TCT inserts difficult to manage?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. As with all Bernardo spiral cutterblocks, maintenance is done insert by insert, not all 72 simultaneously. In practice, 2-5 inserts are addressed at a time, those in the most stressed position or with the most worn cutting edge. The operation requires an hex key and 2 minutes per insert. The high number of inserts is an advantage for cutting quality, not a maintenance burden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the AD 410 S suitable for knotted workpieces?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The TCT spiral cutterblock handles wood with irregular knots better than HSS knives: the helical cutting angle reduces mechanical shock on the insert when passing over a knot, extending the life of the cutting edge. On knotty oak or chestnut with frequent knots, the AD 410 S produces a smoother surface than the HSS version and requires fewer subsequent sanding operations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often are the inserts rotated in professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium woods, an insert rotation is necessary every 6-10 weeks per insert. With 72 inserts on the cutterblock and progressive rotation, maintenance is distributed over weeks: there is never a time when the machine has to be stopped for a complete replacement. TCT spare parts are available from Krollit stock with shipping in 3-5 working days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,685 × 1,045 × 1,100 mm. For a 410 mm working width, at least 2.5-3 m of clear space is needed in front and behind for handling larger workpieces. At 340 kg, delivery requires a equipped flatbed: check access (minimum door width 1.3 m, height 1.4 m with machine on pallet truck).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692577100104,"sku":"08-1069","price":3965.13,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_AD_410_S_con_albero_a_spirale_e_inserti_TCT.jpg?v=1760689481"},{"product_id":"bernardo-fs-310-ps","title":"Bernardo FS 310 PS Planer and Thicknesser with Spiral Cutterblock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 PS jointer-planer offers a planing width of 310 mm, a jointer table of 1,400 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 75 mm with 30 TCT inserts at 4,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 240 mm, a feed rate of 5.4 m\/min, a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor, and an included digital display. Weight 205 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 75 mm – 30 TCT inserts – 4,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.4 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e included as standard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 205 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the FS 310 PS and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 PS is the 310 mm combined planer from the FS family with a spiral cutterblock: positioned between the AD 310 S (295 kg, heavier structure) and lower-end spiral planers. At 205 kg, it is more manageable than the AD 310 S while offering the most generous thicknessing height in the 310 mm range: 240 mm compared to the AD 310 S's 225 mm. The 4,500 rpm cutterblock with 30 TCT inserts produces a high-frequency cut with superior finish quality. The standard digital display for the thicknessing table allows for setting and replicating thicknesses with millimeter precision. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by furniture makers and joiners who regularly work with tall pieces (up to 240 mm) and want TCT to reduce maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFS 310 PS vs AD 310 S: two 310 mm approaches with TCT\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two machines offer the same width (310 mm) and TCT cutterblock, but with different features. The AD 310 S weighs 295 kg (more stable for heavy pieces), has 52 inserts on the Ø 95 mm cutterblock and a thicknessing height up to 225 mm. The FS 310 PS weighs 205 kg (more manageable), has 30 inserts on the Ø 75 mm cutterblock at 4,500 rpm (higher cutting frequency) and a thicknessing height up to 240 mm, the most generous parameter of the two. The choice depends on: very heavy pieces to work (AD 310 S with its mass is superior) or tall pieces up to 240 mm with operational lightness (FS 310 PS).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Bernardo FS 310 PS – 400V is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional machine (205 kg, three-phase, digital display). Cost and features oriented towards continuous professional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm, 240 mm thicknessing height (maximum in its category), TCT cutterblock, digital display: the most complete combination at this width in a manageable format (205 kg).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor production of tall pieces up to 240 mm with the need to reproduce precise thicknesses (digital display) and minimal cutting edge maintenance (TCT).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a 400V three-phase system (also available in 230V version, check availability); pieces over 310 mm wide; those who do not require a thicknessing height over 225 mm (AD 310 S is sufficient and more stable).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e825 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 reversible pcs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,120 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.4 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded as standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase (also available 230V)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 × 900 × 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 205 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterblock with 30 TCT inserts installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 spare TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display for thicknesser table\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhy does the FS 310 PS have 30 inserts and the AD 310 S have 52?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cutterblock of the FS 310 PS is Ø 75 mm (smaller than the Ø 95 mm of the AD 310 S): fewer inserts can be physically mounted in a helical arrangement on a smaller diameter cutterblock. The FS 310 PS compensates with a higher cutterblock speed (4,500 vs 4,300 rpm): the number of cuts per advanced cm remains comparable between the two models. There is no universally superior model: the AD 310 S is superior for heavy pieces requiring structural mass; the FS 310 PS is superior for thicknessing height (240 mm) and manageability (205 vs 295 kg).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the digital display included as standard or optional?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe digital display for thicknesser table adjustment is included as standard in the FS 310 PS, it is not an optional extra. It allows reading and setting the passage height with 0.1 mm precision and replicating previous settings without having to measure the workpiece. For joineries that produce series with repeated thicknesses (e.g., frames, calibrated battens), this feature significantly reduces setup times.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum thicknessing width of the FS 310 PS?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe useful thicknessing width is 305 mm (slightly less than the 310 mm of the jointer). The maximum thicknessing height is 240 mm, the highest among 310 mm planers in the Bernardo catalog. For pieces with heights between 225 and 240 mm, the FS 310 PS is the only option in the 310 mm range; the AD 310 S stops at 225 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it also available in a single-phase 230V version?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe FS 310 PS is available in both 400V three-phase and 230V single-phase versions. Contact Krollit to check the availability of the 230V version and the specifications of the single-phase version (motor power may differ slightly).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,400 × 900 × 980 mm. At 205 kg, it is significantly more manageable than the AD 310 S (295 kg): it can be moved with a manual pallet truck on a flat floor. For workpiece handling, a clear space of at least 2.5 m in front and behind is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"230V","offer_id":51362463318344,"sku":"08-1043","price":2200.07,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"400V","offer_id":51362463351112,"sku":"08-1044","price":2200.07,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_FS_310_PS_400V_con_albero_a_spirale.jpg?v=1777724814"},{"product_id":"pialle-bernardo-pt-200","title":"Bernardo PT 200 Bench Planer\/Thicknesser – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 200 – 230V bench jointer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 205 mm, a jointer table of 740 mm, a Ø 50 mm cutter block with 2 HSS knives at 8,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 120 mm, a feed rate of 7 m\/min, and a 1.25 kW single-phase 230V motor. It weighs 27 kg and has dimensions of 790 × 460 × 480 mm. Manufactured in Austria, it has been distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 205 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 740 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 – 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 50 mm – 2 HSS knives – 8,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 7 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.25 kW S1 \/ 1.75 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 27 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 200 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 200 – 230V is the most compact benchtop combined planer from the Bernardo catalog: 27 kg, dimensions of 790 × 460 × 480 mm, 230V operation. It is not a production machine; it is a tool for those with limited space, who move between construction sites or workshops, or who want a combined planer as a complementary machine in an already equipped workshop. The 120 mm thicknessing height is the main limitation: suitable for battens, frames, and thin pieces, not for beams and structural pieces. The 8,500 rpm of the 2-knife cutter block produces surprisingly good surface finish for the machine's size. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used by itinerant artisans, restorers, and small hobby workshops as a first entry into the world of electric combined planers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 200 is the absolute entry-level combined planer in the Bernardo catalog: below it, there are only hand planers. The next step is the PT 250 – 230V (250 mm width, more powerful) or the ADH 250 P – 400V (250 mm, three-phase). The PT 200 is the choice when portability and compactness are the main criteria, not work capacity. For those who want a stable workshop machine for daily use, the PT 250 or ADH 250 P are already more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South of Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 200 – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27 kg, 230V, minimal footprint: used on a workbench and stored away. First electric combined planer for those taking their first steps in motorized woodworking.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs a complementary machine for battens and small pieces, or for on-site use. As a main machine for a professional workshop, it is undersized.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.25 kW motor and 120 mm thicknessing height are not suitable for continuous professional production. Consider higher-end machines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with a height greater than 120 mm (absolute structural limit); continuous processing of hardwoods for more than 2 hours; use as the sole planer in a full-time professional workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e205 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e740 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e540 × 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 – 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e255 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.25 kW (1.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.75 kW (2.3 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e790 × 460 × 480 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCombined dust extraction hood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Ø 60 mm dust extraction port compatible with standard extractors?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ø 60 mm port is smaller than the industrial standard Ø 100 mm. It is compatible with domestic and light industrial vacuum cleaners equipped with a 60 mm hose or with adapters. For workshop use without a dedicated extractor, the PT 200 produces moderate chip volumes due to its reduced width (205 mm): a domestic vacuum cleaner of 1,000-1,200 W with a Ø 60 mm adapter is sufficient for hobby use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the PT 200 suitable for hardwoods like oak?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith limitations. For oak, it is advisable to reduce the depth of cut to 0.5-1 mm and not exceed 1-2 hours of continuous work. The 1.25 kW motor is dimensioned for soft and medium woods in intermittent use; on hardwoods in continuous cycle, it may overheat. For regular use on oak or ash, the PT 250 or ADH 250 P with 1.5-2.0 kW motors are more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow does switching from jointer to thicknesser work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe switch is done using the combined dust extraction hood: a specific solution of the PT 200 that allows changing modes without moving the dust extraction port. The operation takes 30-60 seconds. The thicknesser table is compact (255 mm long), sufficient for pieces up to approximately 500 mm in length with additional support; for longer pieces, infeed\/outfeed supports are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a dedicated workbench needed for the PT 200?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With a height of only 480 mm, the PT 200 cannot be used on the floor. It must be placed on a stable bench with a depth of at least 500 mm. Its weight of 27 kg makes it easily movable by one person. For on-site use, it can be transported in a car trunk (dimensions 790 × 460 mm) and placed on any stable flat surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the PT 200 suitable as a first electric planer for a hobbyist?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is designed precisely for this purpose. The 27 kg, standard 230V plug, minimal footprint, and lower price compared to professional-grade combined planers make it a suitable entry point into the world of electric planers for those new to woodworking. The limit is the width (205 mm) and thicknessing height (120 mm): for most hobby projects involving battens, frames, and small boards, these are more than sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692583031112,"sku":"08-1005","price":420.91,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_da_banco_Bernardo_PT_200_compatta_e_precisa.jpg?v=1760513817"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-da-banco-pt-260-230v","title":"Bernardo PT 260 – 230V Benchtop Jointer and Thicknesser","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 260 – 230V benchtop planer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 260 mm, a jointer table of 1,050 mm, a Ø 55 mm cutter block with 2 HSS blades at 6,700 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 150 mm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, a 1.6 kW single-phase 230V motor, and an integrated dust extractor with bag included. Weight 75 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,050 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 55 mm – 2 HSS blades – 6,700 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.6 kW S1 \/ 2.2 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDust extractor:\u003c\/strong\u003e integrated with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 75 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 260 – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 260 – 230V is identical to the 400V version in everything except the power supply: single-phase 230V instead of three-phase. It is the choice for those who want the advantages of the PT 260 – lightweight (75 kg), autonomous extraction, fast cutter block at 6,700 rpm – without the need for a three-phase system. It works with any 230V single-phase industrial socket, making it the easiest combined planer with integrated dust extractor to install in the Bernardo catalogue. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used by restorers, itinerant artisans, and advanced hobbyists who want a complete and autonomous machine without investing in a dedicated electrical system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with shipping in 3-5 working days. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 260 – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase 230V, 75 kg, integrated dust extractor: the combined planer with the simplest possible setup. No three-phase system, no separate dust extractor.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor working on battens and boards up to 150 mm high without a three-phase system. As a main machine for joinery with tall pieces, consider the ADM 260 – 230V.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.6 kW single-phase motor and the 150 mm thickness limit are not suitable for continuous industrial production.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with a height exceeding 150 mm; workshops with available three-phase systems (prefer the 400V version for higher motor torque); intensive production on hardwoods for more than 4 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6,700 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 × 110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. chip removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. chip removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.6 kW (2.1 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated with chip collection bag, Ø 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,050 × 650 × 1,050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 mounted HSS blades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated dust extractor with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAluminium fence with prismatic guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGauge included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I connect an external dust extractor to the PT 260 – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The dust extraction port is Ø 80 mm: with a Ø 80-100 mm adapter, an external industrial dust extractor can be connected in place of the integrated bag. This is useful for more intensive production where the bag requires frequent emptying, or for environments where centralized extraction is preferred.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 260 – 230V and ADM 260 – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 260 – 230V weighs 75 kg, has an integrated dust extractor, a thicknessing height of up to 150 mm, and a cutter block at 6,700 rpm. The ADM 260 – 230V weighs 160 kg, does not have an integrated dust extractor, a thicknessing height of up to 190 mm, a cutter block at 3,750 rpm, and tables with noise-absorbing lips. The PT 260 is the choice for those who want lightness and autonomous extraction; the ADM 260 for those who want superior build quality and greater passage height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the chip collection bag be emptied?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on usage. In jointer planing, the volume of chips produced is less than in thicknessing. In continuous professional use (4-6 hours\/day), the bag should be emptied every 1-2 hours in thicknessing mode on softwoods, less frequently on hardwoods with shallow passes. The bag is removable without tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the PT 260 – 230V have a cast iron or aluminum table?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tables are made of rectified aluminum, not cast iron like the AD and ADM versions. Rectified aluminum offers high-quality flatness and smooth sliding of pieces, with a structural weight lower than cast iron, contributing to the machine's total 75 kg. For intensive professional use, the cast iron tables of the AD\/ADM versions offer greater vibrational stability; for hobby and artisan use, the aluminum tables of the PT 260 are adequate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,050 × 650 × 1,050 mm. At 75 kg, it can be moved by one person on a flat floor without equipment. For moving pieces, a free space of at least 1.5 m in front of and behind the machine is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692583784776,"sku":"08-1022","price":1122.4,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_PT_260_Pialla_filo_spessore_230_V_compatta_e_versatile.jpg?v=1756821663"},{"product_id":"bernardo-pt-260-400v","title":"Planer thicknesser Bernardo PT 260 – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 260 – 400V jointer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 260 mm, a jointer table of 1,050 mm, a Ø 55 mm cutter block with 2 HSS knives at 6,700 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 150 mm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, a 1.6 kW three-phase 400V motor, and an integrated dust collector with a bag included. Weight 75 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,050 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 55 mm – 2 HSS knives – 6,700 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.6 kW S1 \/ 2.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDust collector:\u003c\/strong\u003e Integrated with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 75 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 260 – 400V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 260 – 400V is a combined benchtop planer with an integrated dust collector: at 75 kg, it is the lightest in the 260 mm three-phase PT range, designed for those who do not have a fixed dust extraction system in their workshop and want a self-contained and portable machine. The integrated dust collector with bag is the main differentiator from other PT models: it eliminates the need for a separate dust collector, reducing the overall installation cost. The 6,700 rpm cutter block, the fastest in the PT range at this width, produces a high cutting frequency that translates into a superior surface finish compared to slower cutter blocks on machines of similar weight. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used by itinerant craftsmen and small hobby workshops who move between job sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 260 – 400V has a limited thicknessing height of 150 mm: the main limitation compared to the ADH 250 P (185 mm) and AD 260 (185 mm). For those who work exclusively with battens, mouldings, and thin boards, this is not a problem; for those who also work with pieces between 150 and 185 mm high, the PT 260 is not sufficient. The 230V version (PT 260 – 230V) has identical specifications and the same dust collector.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 260 – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequires three-phase 400V. For hobby use without three-phase, prefer the 230V version. The integrated dust collector is a practical advantage in home workshops without a fixed system.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry shop \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor working on pieces up to 150 mm high and 260 mm wide. The integrated dust collector reduces installation costs. For taller pieces, consider ADH 250 P or AD 260.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.6 kW motor and the 150 mm thicknessing limit are not suitable for industrial production. Consider the AD or ADM range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot indicated for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with a thicknessing height greater than 150 mm; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 4 hours\/day; workshops looking for a main production machine (the PT 260 is sized for complementary use or intensive hobby use).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6,700 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 × 110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.6 kW (2.1 hp)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 hp)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated with chip collection bag, Ø 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,050 × 650 × 1,050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated dust collector with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAluminum fence with prismatic guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the integrated dust collector sufficient for professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated dust collector with bag is adequate for hobby and intermittent craft use. For continuous production exceeding 4 hours\/day or for fine dust (MDF, resinous woods), an external industrial dust collector of 1,200-1,500 m³\/h offers better extraction. The nozzle is Ø 80 mm: if connecting an external dust collector, a Ø 80-100 mm adapter is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the limitation of the 150 mm thicknessing height?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum thicknessing height is 150 mm. For working on standard battens, mouldings, boards, and panels, this measurement is sufficient. Pieces exceeding 150 mm in height, such as beams, structural pieces, and solid blocks, cannot be thicknessed on this machine. For heights up to 185 mm, consider the ADH 250 P – 400V; for heights up to 225 mm, the AD 310 – 400V.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the PT 260 – 400V the same as the PT 260 – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe technical specifications (width, cutter block, table, feed, dust collector, weight) are identical. The only difference is the power supply: 400V three-phase vs 230V single-phase. With three-phase available, the 400V version offers more uniform motor torque; without three-phase, the only practical option is the 230V.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 2 HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith 2 HSS knives at 6,700 rpm in intermittent professional use (2-4 hours\/day), sharpening is necessary every 2-4 weeks on softwoods, every 1-2 weeks on hardwoods. Original Bernardo replacement knives are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,050 × 650 × 1,050 mm, making it one of the most compact combined planers in the Bernardo catalog. At 75 kg, it can be moved by one person on a flat floor. For moving workpieces, a clear space of at least 1.5 m in front and behind is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692584341832,"sku":"08-1023","price":1415.2,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_PT_260_con_aspiratore_integrato.jpg?v=1760689066"},{"product_id":"bernardo-ad-260-230v","title":"Bernardo AD 260 Planer Thicknesser – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 – 230V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a surface planer table of 1,090 mm, a Ø 75 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 185 mm, a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min, and a 2.0 kW single-phase 230V motor. Weight 173 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (surface):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSurface planer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,090 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing passage height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 185 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0 kW S1 \/ 2.8 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 173 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the AD 260 – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 – 230V is the single-phase version of the AD 260: same construction specifications (250 mm width, cast iron tables, HSS cutter block) in a 230V configuration for workshops without a three-phase system. At 173 kg and single-phase, it is the most accessible 250 mm cast iron combination planer in the Bernardo catalog for installation in non-industrial premises. Compared to the ADM 260 – 230V (160 kg, superior construction), the AD 260 – 230V has a more essential structure at a lower cost. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is the first professional combination planer for carpenters starting their business in workshops without three-phase power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAD 260 – 230V vs ADM 260 – 230V: which to choose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame width (250 mm), same power supply (230V), same weight (173 vs 160 kg). The ADM 260 – 230V adds tables with sound-absorbing lips, a prismatic fence, and a motor brake: superior construction features for intensive use. The AD 260 – 230V has a more essential construction at a lower cost: suitable for standard professional, non-intensive use. The choice depends on the budget and the expected intensity of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo AD 260 – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase 230V, cast iron tables, 250 mm: adequate for intensive hobby use. For lighter use, the PT 260 – 230V (75 kg, integrated dust extractor) is more practical.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops without three-phase power looking for a cost-effective 250 mm cast iron combination planer. Suitable for shifts up to 5-6 hours on medium woods.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 2.0 kW single-phase motor is not sized for intensive industrial cycles. Consider the AD 260 – 400V three-phase or ADM 260.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e those with three-phase power available (prefer AD 260 – 400V); pieces over 250 mm wide; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 5 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSurface Planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e835 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e715 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0 kW (2.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 kW (3.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e173 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade guard, switch with undervoltage release, anti-restart lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting jig\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between AD 260 – 230V and AD 260 – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdentical specifications (250 mm width, same HSS cutter block, same dimensions, same weight). The only difference is in the power supply: single-phase 230V vs three-phase 400V. With three-phase available, the 400V version is preferable for more uniform motor torque. Without three-phase, the 230V is the only practical option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between AD 260 – 230V and ADM 260 – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM 260 – 230V has tables with sound-absorbing lips, a prismatic fence, and an integrated motor brake, which are superior construction features. The AD 260 – 230V has a more essential construction at a lower cost. Same weight (173 vs 160 kg). For standard professional use, the AD 260 – 230V is adequate; for intensive use or in environments where noise is critical, the ADM 260 – 230V is superior.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 3 HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day), sharpening is necessary every 2-4 weeks for softwoods, every 1-2 weeks for hardwoods. Original Bernardo replacement knives are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I connect any dust extractor to the AD 260 – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction port is Ø 100 mm, standard for professional woodworking dust extractors. Switching from surface planing to thicknessing is facilitated by the simultaneous tilting of the tables and the integrated dust hood that remains connected in both modes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm. For workpiece handling, a clear space of at least 1.8 m in front and behind is required. At 173 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692594958664,"sku":"08-1051","price":1610.45,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_AD_260_con_tavoli_in_ghisa.jpg?v=1760521288"},{"product_id":"bernardo-adh-250p-230v","title":"Bernardo ADH 250 P Planer and Thicknesser – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADH 250 P – 230V planer\/thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,090 mm, a Ø 75 mm shaft with 3 HSS knives at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 185 mm, a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min, and a 1.5 kW single-phase 230V motor. Weight 148 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,090 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 185 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaner shaft:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 kW S1 \/ 2.1 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 148 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ADH 250 P – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADH 250 P – 230V is the single-phase version of the ADH 250 P: same compact structure (148 kg), same HSS shaft, same format, in 230V configuration for installation without three-phase power. Compared to the AD 260 – 230V (173 kg, 2.0 kW), the ADH 250 P – 230V is 25 kg lighter and has a smaller motor (1.5 kW): suitable for intermittent use and workshops with limited needs, with the advantage of greater compactness. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is the first professional combined planer for those starting a single-phase business with a limited budget and space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eADH 250 P – 230V vs AD 260 – 230V: when to choose the lighter one\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame width (250 mm), same power supply (230V). The ADH 250 P – 230V weighs 148 kg (vs 173 kg) and has a 1.5 kW motor (vs 2.0 kW): more maneuverable, less powerful. The AD 260 – 230V with 2.0 kW better handles prolonged cycles on hardwoods. The choice depends on the intensity of use: for intermittent use (2-4 hours\/day) the ADH 250 P is sufficient; for more intensive daily professional use, the AD 260 – 230V is more suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Italian customer support available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Bernardo ADH 250 P – 230V is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase 230V, 148 kg, 250 mm: suitable for intensive hobby use. The grooved infeed roller improves feed quality compared to entry-level planers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops without three-phase power with moderate planing needs (2-4 hours\/day). For more intensive use, consider the AD 260 – 230V with a 2.0 kW motor.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.5 kW single-phase motor is not suitable for industrial cycles. Consider the three-phase AD or ADM range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e those with three-phase power available (consider ADH 250 P – 400V); intensive production on hardwoods for more than 3-4 hours\/day; pieces over 250 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e830 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e715 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e245 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInfeed roller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrooved\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutfeed roller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubberized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.1 kW (2.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,100 × 750 × 1,010 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e148 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 feed handles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the grooved roller and the rubberized roller?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe grooved (toothed) infeed roller offers a more secure grip on the workpiece during feeding, reducing slippage on resinous wood or uneven surfaces. The rubberized outfeed roller prevents marking on the already planed surface, which would otherwise be scratched by a metal roller. The combination of the two rollers improves the quality of the result compared to machines with both smooth steel rollers, a constructive feature of the ADH not present on all entry-level planers in the Bernardo range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between ADH 250 P – 230V and ADH 250 P – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdentical construction specifications. The difference is exclusively in the power supply: single-phase 230V vs three-phase 400V. If three-phase is available, the 400V version is preferable; without three-phase, the 230V is the only viable option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the 1.5 kW motor handle hardwoods like oak?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith limitations. For oak or ash, it is recommended to reduce the depth of cut to 0.5-1 mm and take breaks every 30-45 minutes to prevent the motor from overheating. For intensive work on hardwoods for more than 3-4 hours\/day, consider the AD 260 – 230V with a 2.0 kW motor, which is better sized for this use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,100 × 750 × 1,010 mm. At 148 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet truck. For workpiece handling, a clear space of at least 1.8 m in front and behind is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you switch from jointer to thicknesser?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tables flip up via a hinge, exposing the thicknesser table. The 2 included handles facilitate manual flipping. The operation takes approximately 30-60 seconds without tools. The Ø 100 mm dust extraction hood remains connected in both working modes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692599742792,"sku":"08-1018A","price":1329.85,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_ADH_250_P_con_tavoli_in_ghisa.jpg?v=1760515078"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-adm-260-400-v","title":"Bernardo ADM 260 Planer and Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 260 – 400V jointer-planer offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,080 mm, a Ø 75 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 3,750 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 190 mm, a feed rate of 8 m\/min, and a 2.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Weight approx. 160 kg. Produced in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,080 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 190 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 3,750 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0 kW S1 \/ 2.8 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 160 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the ADM 260 – 400V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo ADM 260 – 400V is the three-phase version of the ADM 260 family: same construction with cast iron tables, prismatic guide, and thicknessing height up to 190 mm, in a 400V three-phase configuration. The 8 m\/min feed rate, higher than the AD 260 – 400V (4.8 m\/min), makes it more productive for roughing soft and medium woods. With available three-phase, it is preferable to the 230V version for its more uniform motor torque. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is the entry-professional combined planer for joinery shops with a three-phase system seeking a 250 mm width with generous thicknessing height (190 mm) at a low cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eADM 260 – 400V vs AD 260 – 400V: what changes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame width (250 mm), same motor (2.0 kW), same weight (160 vs 173 kg). The ADM 260 has a higher thicknessing height (190 vs 185 mm), faster feed rate (8 vs 4.8 m\/min), and ADM construction with a prismatic guide. The AD 260 – 400V has a longer jointer table (1,090 vs 1,080 mm). For standard professional use, the ADM 260 – 400V is the better choice for its faster feed rate and greater thicknessing height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working day shipping. Customer support in Italian available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo ADM 260 – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequires three-phase 400V. For hobby use without three-phase, prefer the 230V version. The 160 kg is manageable with a pallet truck.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm with 190 mm thicknessing height and 8 m\/min feed rate: suitable for professional shifts on soft and medium woods. Three-phase is standard in Italian joineries.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor intensive cycles on hardwoods, consider the ADM 300 – 400V with a 3.0 kW motor. The ADM 260 is dimensioned for shifts up to 6 hours.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without three-phase 400V (choose ADM 260 – 230V); pieces wider than 250 mm; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 6 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSurface Planer (Jointer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3,750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 × 145 mm – prismatic guide, inclinable 90°–45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0 kW (2.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 kW (3.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction outlet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,100 × 750 × 1,110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 160 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and Safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting jig\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between ADM 260 – 400V and ADM 260 – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdentical construction specifications: same width (250 mm), same HSS cutter block, same weight (160 kg), same thicknessing height (190 mm), same feed rate (8 m\/min). The difference is exclusively in the power supply: three-phase 400V vs single-phase 230V. With available three-phase, the 400V version is preferable for more uniform motor torque under load; without three-phase, the 230V is the only viable option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhy is the 8 m\/min feed rate superior to the AD 260 (4.8 m\/min)?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ADM and AD families have different construction philosophies. The AD family is oriented towards structural stability with a slower but uniform feed rate; the ADM family has a faster feed rate optimized for productivity on soft and medium woods. For hardwoods with the ADM 260, it is advisable to reduce the depth of cut to compensate for the higher speed and maintain surface quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a maximum depth of cut of 1.8 mm sufficient for thicknessing?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for the vast majority of finishing operations. Finishing passes typically occur at 0.5-1.5 mm, well within the limit. For aggressive roughing, the jointer mode (max 5 mm depth of cut) is more appropriate: roughing is done with the jointer and finishing with the thicknesser, the standard sequence in professional joinery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 3 HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day), sharpening is necessary every 2-4 weeks for softwoods, every 1-2 weeks for hardwoods. Original Bernardo replacement knives are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 working day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,100 × 750 × 1,110 mm. For workpiece handling, at least 1.8 m of free space is needed in front and behind. With 160 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet truck.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692603707720,"sku":"08-1035","price":1281.05,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_ADM_260_Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_400_V.jpg?v=1757330237"},{"product_id":"bernardo-fs-310p-400v","title":"Bernardo FS 310 P Jointer and Thicknesser - 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 P – 400V jointer-planer offers a planing width of 310 mm, a 1,400 mm jointer table, a Ø 75 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 4,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 240 mm, a feed rate of 5.4 m\/min, a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor, and an included 0.1 mm digital display. Weight approx. 205 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.4 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.1 mm scale included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 205 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the FS 310 P and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 P – 400V is the 310 mm combined planer from the FS family with HSS knives: it differs from the AD 310 in three specific features. The 240 mm thicknessing height is the highest in its 310 mm category with HSS knives, 15 mm above the AD 310 (225 mm) and 60 mm above the PT 310 (180 mm). The 0.1 mm digital display is included as standard, not as an option. The cutter block speed of 4,500 rpm (vs 4,300 for the AD 310) theoretically produces a better surface finish. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by cabinetmakers and window\/door manufacturers who work with pieces up to 240 mm high and need to reproduce precise thicknesses using a display.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFS 310 P vs AD 310: same width, different features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe FS 310 P has a higher thicknessing height (240 vs 225 mm), a faster cutter block (4,500 vs 4,300 rpm), a digital display as standard, but weighs less (205 vs 295 kg) and has a shorter jointer table (1,400 vs 1,610 mm). The AD 310 weighs 90 kg more, offering greater stability for heavy workpieces, and has a longer table. The choice depends on: required thicknessing height (over 225 mm → FS 310 P), need for a digital display (→ FS 310 P), vs. heavy workpieces requiring structural mass (→ AD 310).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Bernardo FS 310 P – 400V is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional machine (205 kg, three-phase, digital display). Dimensions and features oriented towards continuous professional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm with 240 mm thicknessing height (maximum in HSS category), digital display for precise thicknesses, 205 kg more manageable than the AD 310 (295 kg).\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor production of pieces up to 240 mm high with thickness reproduction via display. To eliminate cutting edge maintenance, consider the FS 310 PS with a spiral cutter block.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without 400V three-phase power; pieces over 310 mm wide; those working with heavy pieces that require the structural mass of the AD 310 (295 kg).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (Surface Planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e825 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,120 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.4 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.1 mm scale – included as standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 × 900 × 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 205 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and Safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, cutter block guard, anti-restart lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e0.1 mm digital display\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTilting tables\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the digital display with a 0.1 mm scale really useful in practice?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for those who produce series with repeated thicknesses. The display allows you to set a thickness, visually store it, and reproduce it in subsequent sessions without measuring the workpiece. For the production of frames, calibrated battens, or furniture components requiring tight tolerances (±0.2 mm), it significantly reduces setup times and the number of test passes. For those who always work with different pieces without repeated thicknesses, the display is useful but not essential.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 240 mm thicknessing height really the highest for 310 mm HSS machines?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, among the 310 mm combined planers with HSS knives in the Bernardo catalog, the FS 310 P and the FS 310 PS (version with spiral cutter block) share the record of 240 mm maximum thicknessing height. The AD 310 stops at 225 mm, the PT 310 at 180 mm. For pieces with a height between 225 and 240 mm, the FS 310 P is the only HSS 310 mm option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between FS 310 P and FS 310 PS?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe FS 310 P features 3 HSS knives on the Ø 75 mm cutter block. The FS 310 PS features 30 TCT inserts on the same cutter block. Structure, dimensions, weight, and digital display are identical. TCT offers reduced noise (approx. 50%) and 10-20 times longer cutting edge life. The cost of the FS 310 PS is higher; the savings in maintenance recover it in 12-18 months of professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 3 HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day), sharpening is necessary every 2-3 weeks for softwoods, every 1-2 weeks for hardwoods. Original Bernardo replacement knives are available from Krollit's warehouse with 3-5 business day shipping. The higher frequency compared to the AD 310 (4 knives vs 3) is compensated by the higher cutter block speed, which still produces good surface quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,400 × 900 × 980 mm. At 205 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack on a flat floor, significantly easier to reposition than the AD 310 (295 kg). For workpiece handling, at least 2.5 m of clear space is needed in front and behind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692609016136,"sku":"08-1046","price":2147.27,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_FS_310_P_con_display_digitale..jpg?v=1760685432"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-pt-200-ed-230v","title":"Bernardo PT 200 ED Bench Jointer\/Planer – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 200 ED – 230V benchtop planer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 205 mm, a jointer table of 740 mm, a Ø 50 mm cutter block with 2 HSS blades at 8,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 210 mm, a feed rate of 7 m\/min, and a 1.5 kW single-phase 230V motor. Weight approx. 28 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 205 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 740 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 210 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 50 mm – 2 HSS blades – 8,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 7 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 kW S1 \/ 2.1 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 28 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 200 ED and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 200 ED – 230V is the evolved version of the standard PT 200: same width (205 mm), same weight (28 kg), same cutter block at 8,500 rpm, but with a crucial advantage: a maximum thicknessing height of 210 mm, compared to 120 mm of the standard PT 200. This difference makes the PT 200 ED suitable for a much wider range of workpieces, including beams, structural pieces, and solid blocks up to 210 mm in height. The \"ED\" designation indicates precisely this extended depth capacity. At 28 kg, it remains the lightest and most portable combined planer\/thicknesser in the Bernardo catalog.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePT 200 ED vs PT 200: the difference that matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe only difference is the thicknessing height: 210 mm for the ED versus 120 mm for the standard version. Everything else - width, cutter block, motor, weight, dust extraction - is identical. For those who work with pieces up to 210 mm high, the PT 200 ED is necessary; for those who exclusively work with thin strips and boards (under 120 mm), the standard PT 200 is sufficient at a lower cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 200 ED – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e28 kg, 230V, 210 mm thicknessing height: the most versatile portable combined planer\/thicknesser in the Bernardo catalog. Can be used on a bench, stored, and transported in a car.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs a complementary machine for pieces up to 205 mm wide and 210 mm high. As a main machine for continuous production on hardwoods, it is undersized.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.5 kW motor and benchtop structure are not sized for industrial production. Consider the AD or ADM range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot indicated for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces over 205 mm wide; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 2-3 hours\/day; workshops seeking a main production machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e205 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e740 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e540 × 105 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax chip removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e285 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax chip removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.1 kW (2.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e790 × 480 × 550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 28 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 mounted HSS blades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 200 ED and standard PT 200?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe only difference is the thicknessing height: 210 mm for the ED versus 120 mm for the standard. Width (205 mm), cutter block, motor, weight (28 kg) and dust extraction (Ø 60 mm) are identical. The PT 200 ED is necessary for pieces with heights between 120 and 210 mm; for lower pieces, the standard is sufficient at a lower cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow can the PT 200 ED have a thicknessing height of 210 mm with only 28 kg?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe structure of the PT 200 ED is designed vertically to allow for greater passage height without increasing weight. The height adjustment mechanism is extended compared to the standard version. This makes the PT 200 ED proportionally taller than the standard PT 200 (550 mm vs 480 mm machine height), but with the same weight of 28 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the 1.5 kW motor handle pieces up to 210 mm high?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe height of the workpiece does not directly affect the load on the motor; the width and depth of cut do. A piece 210 mm high but 100 mm wide is lighter to plane than a panel 200 mm wide. The 1.5 kW motor is adequate for cuts of 0.5-1.5 mm on medium woods regardless of the workpiece height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a dedicated workbench required?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With a height of 550 mm, the PT 200 ED cannot be used on the floor. It must be placed on a stable workbench with a depth of at least 500 mm. At 28 kg, it can be moved alone without equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it compatible with standard dust collectors?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction port is Ø 60 mm, smaller than the standard Ø 100 mm. Compatible with domestic and light industrial dust collectors with a 60 mm hose or with adapters. For professional use, a Ø 60-100 mm adapter is needed to connect standard industrial dust collectors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692613472584,"sku":"08-1006","price":610.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/PT_200_ED_con_aspirazione_compatta_e_ideale_per_lavorazioni_mobili.jpg?v=1751468616"},{"product_id":"pialle-bernardo-pt-250","title":"Bernardo PT 250 Bench Planer\/Thicknesser – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 250 – 230V benchtop planer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 255 mm, a jointer table of 925 mm, a shaft with 2 HSS blades, a maximum thicknessing height of 120 mm, a feed rate of 7 m\/min, and a 1.5 kW single-phase 230V motor. Compact weight with a portable design. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 255 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 925 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e up to 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaner shaft:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 HSS blades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 7 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 kW S1 \/ 2.1 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDust extraction:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm integrated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 250 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 250 – 230V is a 255 mm combined benchtop planer: wider than the PT 200 (205 mm) and the PT 200 ED (205 mm), with rectified aluminium tables and a portable design. With a width of 255 mm, it covers the vast majority of workpieces in hobby and light artisanal woodworking. The 120 mm thicknessing height is the main limit: sufficient for battens, frames, and standard boards, but not for structural pieces. The combined dust hood allows for quick switching between jointing and thicknessing modes without disconnecting the extractor. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is the primary combined benchtop planer for those who want more width than the PT 200 in a still portable format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 250 – 230V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e255 mm width in a portable format with 230V: suitable for most hobby projects. Rectified aluminium tables for good precision.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 emp.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs a complementary machine for narrow pieces or on-site work. As a main machine for professional production, it is undersized for thicknessing height (120 mm) and power.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot sized for industrial production. Consider the AD or ADM range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with a height over 120 mm; intensive production on hardwoods; workshops looking for a main professional production machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlaner (jointer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e255 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e925 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTables\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRectified aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e620 × 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. passage height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.1 kW (2.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm integrated with combined hood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e970 × 460 × 990 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/CE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 HSS blades installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCombined dust hood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 250 and PT 200?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 250 offers 50 mm more width (255 vs 205 mm) and a longer jointer table (925 vs 740 mm). The maximum thicknessing height is identical (120 mm). The motor is identical (1.5 kW). The PT 250 is the choice when more working width is needed; the PT 200 is more compact and less expensive. Both have a thicknessing height limited to 120 mm; for taller pieces, consider the PT 200 ED (210 mm) or the combined planers from the AD\/ADM range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre rectified aluminum tables as precise as cast iron ones?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hobby and light artisanal use, rectified aluminum offers adequate flatness and a smoother surface. For intensive professional use, the cast iron tables of the AD and ADM versions offer greater vibrational stability and durability. The choice of table material is one of the main construction differences between the PT benchtop planers and the professional AD\/ADM planers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow does the combined dust hood work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combined hood allows switching from jointing mode to thicknessing mode while keeping the extractor connected; there's no need to disconnect and reconnect the hose. It's a deflector that automatically redirects the suction flow based on the active mode. Practical for workshops where mode changes occur frequently throughout the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a dedicated workbench needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With a height of 990 mm, the PT 250 is designed to be used as a freestanding machine on the floor; it does not require an additional workbench like smaller benchtop versions (PT 200). The footprint of 970 × 460 mm is compact and easily fits even in workshops with limited space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 970 × 460 × 990 mm. For handling workpieces, a clear space of at least 1.5 m in front and behind is needed. The portable design allows for movement without special equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692615176520,"sku":"08-1007","price":561.22,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_PT_250_con_tavoli_in_alluminio.jpg?v=1760513125"},{"product_id":"bernardo-pt-305d-400v","title":"Bernardo PT 305 D Planer Thicknesser – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 305 D – 400V jointer and thicknesser offers a planing width of 305 mm, a 1,080 mm jointer table, a Ø 62 mm cutter block with 2 HSS knives at 6,700 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 160 mm, a feed rate of 8.5 m\/min, a 1.8 kW three-phase 400V motor, and an integrated dust extractor with a bag. Weight 94 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 305 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,080 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 – 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 62 mm – 2 HSS knives – 6,700 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.5 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.8 kW S1 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDust extractor:\u003c\/strong\u003e integrated with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 94 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 305 D – 400V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 305 D – 400V is the 305 mm three-phase benchtop combination planer with integrated dust extractor: at 94 kg, it offers a 305 mm width in a significantly lighter format than professional cast iron planers of the same width (AD 310: 295 kg). The 8.5 m\/min feed rate is among the fastest in the PT range. The \"D\" indicates the presence of an integrated dust extractor with a trolley included, the main differentiator from the standard PT 305. The thicknessing height of 160 mm is the main limitation: sufficient for most work on boards and panels, but not for tall beams. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by artisans who work with pieces up to 305 mm in three-phase without wanting to invest in a fixed dust extraction system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePT 305 D vs PT 305 (standard): the difference\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe D version adds an integrated dust extractor with a chip collection bag and a trolley for movement. Everything else—width, cutter block, motor, weight—is identical. The D is preferable for workshops without a fixed dust extraction system; the standard is for those who already have a dust extractor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 305 D – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRequires three-phase 400V. For hobby use without three-phase, prefer the 230V version. The integrated dust extractor is a practical advantage in workshops without a fixed system.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 emp.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm with integrated dust extractor and trolley at 94 kg: the combination for those working with wide pieces without wanting to install fixed systems. For pieces taller than 160 mm, consider AD 310.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.8 kW motor and the 160 mm thicknessing limit are not suitable for continuous industrial production. Consider the AD or ADM range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot indicated for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with a height exceeding 160 mm; workshops without three-phase 400V (choose PT 305 D – 230V); intensive production on hardwoods for more than 4 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTables\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGround aluminum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 62 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6,700 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser (thickness planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 – 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.5 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 kW (2.4 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated with bag, Ø 100\/75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e94 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated dust extractor with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTrolley for movement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFence with prismatic guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 305 D – 400V and PT 305 D – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdentical construction specifications. The difference is exclusively in the power supply: three-phase 400V vs single-phase 230V. With three-phase available, the 400V version is preferable for more uniform motor torque; without three-phase, the 230V is the only viable option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the 160 mm thicknessing height significantly limit operations?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the pieces being worked. For battens, frames, boards, and panels up to 160 mm in height, the PT 305 D is sufficient and covers the vast majority of artisanal woodworking projects. For beams and structural pieces over 160 mm, it is necessary to consider the AD 310 (225 mm) or the FS 310 P (240 mm).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the PT 305 D – 400V include the trolley?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The D version includes the trolley for internal movement, which is one of the differentiators from the standard PT 305. At 94 kg, the trolley allows the machine to be moved around the workshop without additional equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 2 HSS knives be sharpened?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day), sharpening is necessary every 2-4 weeks for softwoods, every 1-2 weeks for hardwoods. Original Bernardo replacement knives are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt 94 kg, it can be moved with the included trolley on a level floor. For moving pieces, a clear space of at least 2 m in front and behind is needed. Contact Krollit for complete machine dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692617470280,"sku":"08-1025","price":1451.85,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_PT_305_D_con_aspiratore_integrato..jpg?v=1760545403"},{"product_id":"bernardo-fs-310p-230v","title":"Bernardo FS 310 P Jointer and Planer - 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 P – 230V planer\/thicknesser offers a planing width of 310 mm, a surface planing table of 1,400 mm, a Ø 75 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 4,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 240 mm, a feed rate of 5.4 m\/min, a 3.0 kW single-phase 230V motor, and an included digital display with 0.1 mm scale. Weight approx. 205 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (surface planer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSurface planing table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 75 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.4 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.1 mm scale – included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 205 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the FS 310 P – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 P – 230V is identical to the 400V version in everything except the power supply: single-phase 230V instead of three-phase. With a 3.0 kW single-phase motor, it is the most powerful combined planer\/thicknesser in a single-phase 310 mm configuration available in the Bernardo catalog. For workshops without a three-phase system that work with pieces up to 310 mm wide and 240 mm high with the need for a digital display, it is the only option at this width. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by woodworking shops in non-industrial premises, where three-phase power is not available, that work with doors, panels, and beams with precise thickness requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFS 310 P – 230V vs FS 310 P – 400V: when to choose single-phase\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame operating specifications: 310 mm width, 240 mm thicknessing height, 4,500 rpm cutter block, digital display, identical dimensions and weight. The only difference is the power supply. Where three-phase is available, the 400V version is always preferable for more uniform motor torque. The 230V is only necessary for those who do not have three-phase and do not intend to install it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo FS 310 P – 230V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional machine weighing 205 kg with a 3.0 kW motor. Dimensions and features oriented towards professional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe most complete combined planer\/thicknesser at 310 mm available in single-phase: 240 mm thicknessing height, digital display, 205 kg. For workshops without three-phase that do not want to compromise on width.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 3.0 kW single-phase motor is suitable for shifts up to 6-7 hours on medium woods. For more intensive production with three-phase available, prefer the 400V version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e those with three-phase available (prefer FS 310 P – 400V); pieces over 310 mm wide; intensive production on hard woods over 7 hours\/day in single-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSurface Planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,120 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.4 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.1 mm scale – included as standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 × 900 × 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 205 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display with 0.1 mm scale\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTiltable tables\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety push block\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between FS 310 P – 230V and FS 310 P – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo operational difference: same width, same cutter block, same weight, same digital display, same dimensions. The difference is exclusively in the power supply: single-phase 230V vs three-phase 400V. Where three-phase is available, the 400V version is always preferable; without three-phase, the 230V is the only option at this performance level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan a 3.0 kW single-phase motor handle professional use at 310 mm?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for shifts up to 6-7 hours on medium woods (cherry, walnut, pine). For hard woods (oak, ash), it is advisable to reduce the depth of cut to 1.5-2 mm to avoid overloading the motor. Peak absorption during start-up requires a dedicated line with a miniature circuit breaker of at least 20A.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 240 mm thicknessing height the highest available at 310 mm in single-phase?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Among the 310 mm combined planer\/thicknessers in the single-phase 230V Bernardo catalog, the FS 310 P – 230V and the FS 310 PS – 230V (version with spiral cutter block) share the record of 240 mm maximum thicknessing height, superior to the AD 310 (225 mm) and the PT 310 (180 mm).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,400 × 900 × 980 mm. At 205 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack. For moving pieces, clear space of at least 2.5 m in front and behind is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 3 HSS knives be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day), sharpening is necessary every 2-3 weeks on softwoods, every 1-2 weeks on hardwoods. Original Bernardo spare parts are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692618879304,"sku":"08-1045","price":2191.19,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_FS_310_P_con_display_digitale.jpg?v=1760534343"},{"product_id":"bernardo-pt-305d-230v","title":"Bernardo PT 305 D Planer and Thicknesser - 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 305 D – 230V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 305 mm, a jointer table of 1,080 mm, a Ø 62 mm cutter block with 2 HSS knives at 6,700 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 160 mm, a feed rate of 8.5 m\/min, a 1.8 kW single-phase 230V motor, and an integrated dust extractor with bag. Weight 94 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 305 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,080 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 – 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 62 mm – 2 HSS knives – 6,700 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknesser feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.5 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.8 kW S1 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtractor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Integrated with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 94 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 305 D – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 305 D – 230V is the single-phase version of the PT 305 D – 400V: same operational specifications (305 mm width, integrated extractor, trolley, 94 kg) in a 230V configuration for workshops without three-phase power. With a 305 mm width, integrated extractor, trolley, and single-phase 230V, it is the most complete and self-contained combined planer available without requiring a three-phase system in this benchtop width range. The 8.5 m\/min feed rate is the fastest in the 305 mm PT range. In Krollit customer workshops, it is the complementary planer for itinerant artisans or small woodworking shops in non-industrial premises that work pieces up to 305 mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePT 305 D – 230V vs PT 305 D – 400V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdentical construction specifications: 305 mm width, 6,700 rpm cutter block, integrated extractor, trolley, 94 kg weight. The only difference is the power supply. With three-phase available, the 400V version is preferable for more uniform motor torque; without three-phase, the 230V is the only option at this level of completeness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo PT 305 D – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm with integrated extractor and trolley, 94 kg, single-phase: practical and self-contained. The 160 mm thicknessing height covers most hobby projects.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe most complete combined planer at 305 mm in single-phase: width, integrated extractor, trolley. For workshops without three-phase power that work pieces up to 160 mm high.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 1.8 kW single-phase motor is not suitable for continuous industrial production on hardwoods. Consider the three-phase FS or AD range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces with height greater than 160 mm; those with three-phase available (prefer PT 305 D – 400V); intensive production on hardwoods for more than 4 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTables\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGround aluminum with noise-reducing slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 62 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6,700 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45° with prismatic guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax chip removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 – 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax chip removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.5 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 kW (2.4 hp)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated with bag, Ø 100\/75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e94 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 mounted HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated dust extractor with chip collection bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTrolley for movement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFence with prismatic guide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between PT 305 D – 230V and PT 305 D – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo structural difference: same width, same cutter block, same integrated extractor, same trolley, same weight (94 kg). The difference is exclusively in the power supply: single-phase 230V vs three-phase 400V. With three-phase available, the 400V version is preferable; without three-phase, the 230V is the only choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 8.5 m\/min feed rate the fastest in the 305 mm PT range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Among Bernardo combined planers at 305 mm, the PT 305 D has the fastest thicknesser feed rate (8.5 m\/min) compared to the standard PT 305 (7 m\/min). The higher speed increases productivity on softwoods for roughing; on hardwoods, it is advisable to reduce the depth of cut to compensate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the included trolley support the machine's 94 kg weight?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The trolley integrated into the PT 305 D is specifically designed for this machine and sized for its 94 kg weight. It allows movement on a flat floor without additional equipment. It is not suitable for uneven surfaces or ramps.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 2 HSS knives be sharpened?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day), sharpening is necessary every 2-4 weeks for softwoods, every 1-2 weeks for hardwoods. Original Bernardo spare parts are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith 94 kg and the included trolley, the machine can be easily moved in the workshop. For handling workpieces, at least 2 m of clear space is needed in front and behind. Contact Krollit for the complete dimensions of the machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692622123336,"sku":"08-1024","price":1451.85,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_PT_305_D_con_aspiratore_integrato.jpg?v=1760517030"},{"product_id":"bernardo-sp-150pn-400v","title":"Bernardo SP 150 PN Jointer - 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 150 PN – 400V jointer offers a planing width of 150 mm, a total table length of 1,230 mm (infeed 590 mm + outfeed 585 mm), a Ø 60 mm cutterblock with 3 HSS knives at 4,500 rpm, a maximum cutting depth of 8 mm, and a 1.1 kW three-phase 400V motor. Weight: 115 kg. This machine is a jointer only; it does not have a thicknessing function. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e Jointer only\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal table length:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,230 mm (590 infeed + 585 outfeed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 60 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. cutting depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.1 kW S1 \/ 1.5 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 115 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SP 150 PN – 400V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 150 PN – 400V is the version with HSS knives (not TCT) of the three-phase SP 150: same width (150 mm), same table (1,230 mm), same motor, but with 3 HSS knives instead of the 28 TCT inserts of the SP 150 PS. \"PN\" indicates the version with normal knives (Plain Normal). Compared to the SP 150 PS, the PN has one more knife (3 vs 2 in the HSS variant of the PS, note: the PS has 28 TCT inserts) and the same Ø 60 mm cutterblock. The choice between PN and PS depends on the preference for cutting edge technology: HSS with periodic sharpening (PN) vs TCT with insert rotation (PS). The PN has a lower purchase cost; the PS has lower long-term maintenance costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSP 150 PN vs SP 150 PS: which to choose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SP 150 PN is equipped with 3 HSS knives on a Ø 60 mm cutterblock, the same diameter and speed (4,500 rpm) as the SP 150 PS. The PS is equipped with 28 TCT inserts. The PN requires periodic knife sharpening; the PS only requires rotation of the inserts when worn. For those who do not want to change technology and already have experience with HSS sharpening, the PN is the natural choice. For those who want to eliminate sharpening from their routine, the PS is superior.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South of Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo SP 150 PN – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDedicated jointer with three-phase power: not suitable for standard hobby use. For hobbies, consider combined jointer-planer machines in single-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLuthier \/ restorer with three-phase power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm with HSS knives and 1,230 mm table: suitable for narrow pieces. For those who want minimal maintenance, consider the SP 150 PS with TCT.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery with separate thicknesser\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDedicated jointer to complement an existing thicknesser. The PN has a lower cost than the PS; the PS has lower long-term maintenance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without 400V three-phase power (choose SP 150 PN – 230V); pieces over 150 mm wide; those who also need a thicknessing function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e585 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e820 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. cutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e740 × 100 mm, inclinable 90°–45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 kW (1.5 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,230 × 530 × 1,180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e115 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 HSS knives mounted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SP 150 PN and SP 150 PS?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SP 150 PN is equipped with 3 HSS knives on a Ø 60 mm cutterblock, which require periodic sharpening. The SP 150 PS is equipped with 28 TCT inserts on the same cutterblock, which are rotated when worn, without disassembly. Same cutterblock, same speed (4,500 rpm), same table (1,230 mm), same motor, same weight. The PN has a lower purchase cost; the PS has lower long-term maintenance. The choice depends on technological preference and intensity of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the SP 150 PN have a thicknessing function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The SP 150 PN is exclusively a jointer. For a combined jointer-planer function, consider the PT family planers (PT 260, PT 310) or the AD\/ADM Bernardo family.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 3 HSS knives be sharpened?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day) on medium woods, sharpening is necessary every 2-4 weeks. Original Bernardo replacement knives are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business days shipping. For those who want to reduce the frequency of sharpening, consider the SP 150 PS with TCT inserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,230 × 530 × 1,180 mm. With 115 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet truck. The width of 530 mm allows for placement even in narrow workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SP 150 PN – 400V and SP 150 PN – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIdentical constructive specifications. The difference is only in the power supply: three-phase 400V vs single-phase 230V. If three-phase is available, the 400V version is preferable; if not, the 230V is necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692629954888,"sku":"08-10131","price":991.9,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_Bernardo_SP_150_PN_con_tavoli_in_ghisa_rettificata..jpg?v=1760545108"},{"product_id":"bernardo-dh-310-s","title":"Bernardo DH 310 S Thicknesser – 400V with spiral cutter block","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DH 310 S – 400V thicknesser offers a working width of 310 mm, working height of 5–230 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 95 mm with 52 TCT inserts at 4,050 rpm, a maximum cutting depth of 5 mm, automatic feed of 6 m\/min, digital height indicator included, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Weight approx. 180 kg. This machine is a thicknesser only; it does not have a jointer function. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e thickness planing only\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height (min–max):\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 95 mm – 52 TCT inserts – 4,050 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax cutting depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital height indicator:\u003c\/strong\u003e included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 180 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the DH 310 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DH 310 S is a dedicated thicknesser (not a combination machine): the choice when you already have a separate jointer and are looking for a machine optimized exclusively for thickness reduction. Compared to combination jointer-thicknessers, dedicated thicknessers have more robust feeding mechanisms, tables with integrated extensions and rollers, and structures optimized for continuous thicknessing cycles. The DH 310 S adds the TCT spiral cutterblock with 52 inserts, the same as the AD 310 S, with up to 50% noise reduction and maintenance by rotating the inserts. The digital height indicator is included as standard. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used by joineries that already have a jointer and are looking for a thicknesser of higher quality than versions with HSS knives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDedicated vs. combination thicknesser: when to choose the DH 310 S\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA dedicated thicknesser optimizes this function exclusively: longer table (930 mm with extensions and rollers) for long workpieces, more robust feeding mechanism for continuous cycles, structure sized for a single function. It makes sense when you already have a separate jointer and process a high volume of thicknessing that requires a dedicated machine. For those who do not yet have a jointer, a combination jointer-thicknesser like the AD 310 S is more versatile as a first investment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo DH 310 S – 400V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional dedicated thicknesser (180 kg, three-phase). For hobby use, consider more versatile combination jointer-thicknessers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery with separate jointer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm with TCT cutterblock, digital indicator, and table with extensions and rollers: the dedicated thicknesser for those who already have a jointer and want to optimize the thicknessing phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor intensive thicknessing cycles, the dedicated machine offers a more robust feed and minimal TCT maintenance compared to combination machines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a separate jointer (consider a combination jointer-thicknesser); workshops without 400V three-phase power; workpieces wider than 310 mm; those who also need a jointer function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable with extensions and rollers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e930 × 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax cutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e52 reversible pcs (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,050 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital height indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded as standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 600 × 1,020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 180 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the DH 310 S also have a jointer function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Bernardo DH 310 S is exclusively a thicknesser; it does not have an alignment table or fence, so it cannot be used for jointing. For the combined jointer+thicknesser function, the AD 310 S (same width, same TCT cutterblock with 52 inserts) is the alternative with both functions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between DH 310 S and AD 310 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DH 310 S is a thicknesser only; the AD 310 S is a combination jointer-thicknesser. Both use the same Ø 95 mm cutterblock with 52 TCT inserts. The DH 310 S has a longer thicknessing table with integrated extensions and rollers (930 mm total) optimized for continuous thicknessing cycles. The AD 310 S has the alignment table for the jointer function in addition. For those who already have a separate jointer, the DH 310 S is the optimized choice for the thicknessing phase; for those who do not have a jointer, the AD 310 S is more versatile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the advantage of the integrated rollers on the table?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rollers integrated into the table extensions facilitate the movement of long workpieces during feeding and exiting, reducing operator effort and the risk of the workpiece jamming or tilting during passage. In dedicated thicknessers, rollers are standard because the machine works exclusively with workpieces in automatic feed, often long and heavy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often are the 52 TCT inserts rotated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium woods, one rotation is necessary every 6-10 weeks per insert. With 52 inserts, rotation is progressive: they do not all stop at once. Replacement TCT inserts are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,110 × 600 × 1,020 mm. For feeding and exiting workpieces, a clear space of at least 2 m in front and behind is needed. With 180 kg Bernardo shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692636410184,"sku":"08-1096","price":2537.69,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_DH_310_S_Pialla_a_spessore_310_mm_con_albero_a_spirale_400_V.jpg?v=1757531013"},{"product_id":"bernardo-dh-410-s","title":"Thicknesser Bernardo DH 410 S – 400V with spiral cutter block","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DH 410 S – 400V thicknesser offers a working width of 410 mm, working height of 5–230 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 95 mm with 72 TCT inserts at 4,050 rpm, a maximum depth of cut of 5 mm, automatic feed of 6 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Approx. weight 239 kg. This is a thicknesser only machine; it does not have a jointer function. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e Thickness planing only\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 410 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height (min–max):\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e Spiral Ø 95 mm – 72 TCT inserts – 4,050 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. depth of cut:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e Approx. 239 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the DH 410 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DH 410 S is the dedicated 410 mm thicknesser with a TCT spiral cutterblock: the choice for joineries with a separate planer that work with doors, panels, and wide beams in continuous cycles and want to eliminate blade maintenance. The 72 TCT inserts on the Ø 95 mm cutterblock offer the same cutting quality as the AD 410 S but in a machine optimized exclusively for thicknessing, with a longer bed including extensions and integrated rollers compared to combination machines. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used by carpenters and cabinet makers with high-volume thicknessing needs who have already separated the two functions into dedicated machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDH 410 S vs AD 410 S: dedicated thicknesser vs. combination machine\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth machines feature the Ø 95 mm cutterblock with 72 TCT inserts. The DH 410 S is optimized for thicknessing only: bed with extensions and integrated rollers for long workpieces, and a more compact structure (239 kg vs 340 kg for the AD 410 S). The AD 410 S additionally has a jointer function but weighs 100 kg more. For those who already have a separate planer, the DH 410 S is lighter and more optimized; for those who do not have a planer, the AD 410 S is more versatile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLogistics and Krollit support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo DH 410 S – 400V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDedicated professional thicknesser (239 kg, three-phase). For hobby use, consider combined jointer+thicknesser machines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJoinery with separate planer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm with 72 TCT inserts, bed with rollers and digital indicator: optimal for continuous thicknessing cycles on wide workpieces with minimal maintenance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor high volumes at 410 mm, TCT almost completely eliminates downtime for blade maintenance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a separate planer; workshops without three-phase 400V; workpieces wider than 410 mm; those who also need a jointer function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72 reversible pcs (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,050 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 710 × 1,020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 239 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the DH 410 S also have a jointer function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The DH 410 S is exclusively a thicknesser. It does not have an outfeed table or fence for jointing. For a combined jointer+thicknesser function at 410 mm, the AD 410 S (same TCT cutterblock, same format) is the alternative with both functions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between DH 410 S (TCT) and DH 410 (HSS)?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DH 410 S features 72 TCT inserts on the Ø 95 mm cutterblock; the DH 410 features 4 HSS knives on the same cutterblock. The structure, dimensions, and motor are identical. TCT offers approximately 50% reduced noise and 10-20 times longer blade life. The DH 410 S has a higher cost but recoups it in saved maintenance within 12-18 months of professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often are the 72 TCT inserts rotated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium woods, one rotation per insert is needed every 6-10 weeks. With 72 inserts, rotation is progressive and distributed over time, they never all stop at once. Replacement inserts are available from Krollit's warehouse with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,110 × 710 × 1,020 mm. For feeding and exiting workpieces up to 410 mm wide, a clear space of at least 2.5 m in front and behind is needed. With 239 kg Bernardo shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust extractor is needed for the DH 410 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust extraction port is Ø 100 mm. For a 410 mm width, a dust extractor with a minimum airflow of 800-1,000 m³\/h is recommended. The Bernardo DC 600 (400V) is the recommended solution for continuous professional use at this width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692639916360,"sku":"08-1108","price":3123.31,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_DH_410_S_Pialla_a_spessore_410_mm_con_albero_a_spirale.jpg?v=1757530592"},{"product_id":"bernardo-dh-410-400v","title":"Bernardo DH 410 Thickness Planer – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DH 410 – 400V thicknesser offers a working width of 410 mm, working height of 5–230 mm, Ø 95 mm shaft with 4 HSS blades at 4,050 rpm, a maximum cutting depth of 5 mm, automatic feed of 6 m\/min, and a 3.0 kW three-phase 400V motor. Weight 239 kg. This is a thicknesser-only machine, it does not have a jointer function. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e thickness planing only\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 410 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height (min–max):\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShaft:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 95 mm – 4 HSS blades – 4,050 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax cutting depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 239 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the DH 410 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DH 410 – 400V is a dedicated 410 mm thicknesser with HSS blades: the standard cutting edge version of the DH 410 S (which has a TCT spiral cutterhead). With a 410 mm width and thicknessing height up to 230 mm, it handles professional-sized doors, panels, and beams. The table with extensions (930 mm total) and integrated rollers facilitates feeding long workpieces. For those who already have a separate jointer and are looking for a 410 mm thicknesser at a lower cost than the TCT version. In Krollit customer workshops, it is used by carpenters and cabinetmakers who work continuously on wide pieces and accept periodic maintenance of HSS blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDH 410 (HSS) vs DH 410 S (TCT): which to choose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame structure, same motor, same dimensions and weight (239 kg). The DH 410 uses 4 HSS blades, requiring sharpening every 1-4 weeks in professional use. The DH 410 S uses 72 TCT inserts, requiring rotation every 6-10 weeks per insert. The DH 410 has a lower purchase cost; the DH 410 S has lower maintenance costs over time. The choice depends on the volume and intensity of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo DH 410 – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional dedicated thicknesser (239 kg, three-phase). For hobby use, consider combined jointer-planer machines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpentry workshop with separate jointer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm with 230 mm height, table with rollers: optimal for continuous thicknessing of wide workpieces. Lower purchase cost than the DH 410 S, with periodic HSS maintenance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor very high volumes, consider the DH 410 S with TCT to reduce maintenance downtime. The DH 410 HSS is suitable for shifts up to 6-7 hours on medium woods.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without a separate jointer; workshops without 400V three-phase power; workpieces over 410 mm wide; those who also need a jointer function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable with extensions and rollers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e930 × 410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax cutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,050 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 710 × 1,020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e239 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/CE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 mounted HSS blades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade setting jig\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the DH 410 have a jointer function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The DH 410 is exclusively a thicknesser. For a combined jointer-planer function at 410 mm, the AD 410, AD 410 S, or PT 410 S machines are the appropriate alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between DH 410 and DH 410 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DH 410 uses 4 HSS blades; the DH 410 S uses 72 TCT inserts. Structure, motor, dimensions, and weight are identical (239 kg). TCT offers approx. 50% reduced noise and 10-20 times longer cutting edge life. The DH 410 has a lower purchase cost; the DH 410 S has lower maintenance over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often do the 4 HSS blades need sharpening?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium woods, sharpening is needed every 2-3 weeks. On hardwoods, every 1-2 weeks. Original Bernardo spare blades are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,110 × 710 × 1,020 mm. For feeding workpieces up to 410 mm wide, at least 2.5 m of clear space is needed in front and behind. With 239 kg Bernardo shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust collector is needed for the DH 410?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dust port connection is Ø 100 mm. For a 410 mm width, a dust collector with a minimum airflow of 800-1,000 m³\/h is recommended. The Bernardo DC 600 (400V) is the recommended solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692709253448,"sku":"08-1107","price":2623.09,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_spessore_Bernardo_DH_410_con_display_digitale_e_rulli_integrati.png?v=1760523010"},{"product_id":"bernardo-tp-630d-400v","title":"Industrial Thickness Planer Bernardo TP 630 D – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TP 630 D – 400V industrial thickness planer offers a working width of 630 mm, a working height of 4–300 mm, a Ø 120 mm shaft with 4 HSS knives at 5,000 rpm, variable feed speed of 5–18 m\/min, a 7.5 kW main motor, a 1.5 kW feed motor, and 2 dust extraction ports of Ø 150 mm. Weight 1,250 kg. This machine is for thickness planing only; it does not have a jointing function. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e thickness planing only (industrial)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 630 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height (min–max):\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 – 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShaft:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 120 mm – 4 HSS knives – 5,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVariable feed speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 18 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMain motor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 7.5 kW S1\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed motor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDust extraction:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 × Ø 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,250 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TP 630 D and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TP 630 D is an industrial thickness planer: with a 630 mm width, Ø 120 mm shaft, 7.5 kW motor, and a 1,250 kg structure, it is a completely different category of machine compared to the DH 310\/410. It is designed for continuous production on extra-wide boards and panels, industrial joinery, laminated panel manufacturers, and highly automated carpentry workshops. The variable feed speed from 5 to 18 m\/min allows for optimizing speed based on wood type and depth of cut. The 2 Ø 150 mm dust extraction ports indicate a volume of chips produced that requires a high-capacity centralized dust extraction system. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used by manufacturers of structural timber elements and industrial joinery with dedicated production lines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo TP 630 D – 400V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial machine weighing 1,250 kg. Size, cost, and installation requirements are incompatible with hobby use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry shop \/ craftsman\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe TP 630 D is sized for high-volume industrial production. For artisan carpentry, consider the DH 310 S or DH 410 S.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial production \/ joinery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e630 mm width, 300 mm height, 7.5 kW motor, variable feed speed: the thickness planer for production lines on extra-wide boards and panels in continuous cycles.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e any non-industrial context; workshops without a centralized Ø 150 mm dust extraction system; sites without access for a crane or forklift; pieces under 300 mm in width (oversized machine).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThickness planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e630 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 – 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,200 × 630 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rollers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed speed (variable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 18 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction ports\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × Ø 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain motor S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.5 kW (10.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable lift motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.37 kW (0.5 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 × 1,240 × 1,500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/CE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat dust extraction system is needed for the TP 630 D?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TP 630 D has 2 Ø 150 mm dust extraction ports, double the industrial standard of Ø 100 mm. It requires a centralized dust extraction system with a minimum flow rate of 3,000-4,000 m³\/h to effectively manage the volume of chips produced by 630 mm width at full power. A standard mobile extractor is not sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the TP 630 D delivered?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt 1,250 kg, delivery requires preliminary coordination with Krollit to plan: heavy vehicle access to the site, availability of a crane or forklift with at least 2 tons capacity for unloading and positioning. Contact Krollit before ordering for a complete logistical assessment of the installation site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the variable feed speed 5–18 m\/min really useful in production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, in industrial production, it is a critical parameter. At 5 m\/min, hardwoods are planed for finishing with thin cuts; at 18 m\/min, productivity is maximized on softwoods for roughing. The ability to vary the speed based on wood type and depth of cut is essential for optimizing quality and productivity on a line with different materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat foundation does the TP 630 D require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt 1,250 kg, the machine requires a standard reinforced concrete industrial floor (typically 15-20 cm thick for static loads). It does not require a special foundation or bolting to the ground under normal conditions, but it is advisable to check the load-bearing capacity of the specific site's floor with a structural engineer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs customer support available in Italian for the TP 630 D?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Krollit, as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007, provides customer support in Italian for the entire range, including industrial machines like the TP 630 D. Original Bernardo spare parts are available. For routine and extraordinary maintenance, contact Krollit's technical service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692711186760,"sku":"08-1126","price":11370.79,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_spessore_Bernardo_TP_630_D_con_tavolo_motorizzato_e_display_digitale.png?v=1760541222"},{"product_id":"bernardo-sp-150pn-230v","title":"Bernardo SP 150 PN Jointer - 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 150 PN – 230V planer offers a planing width of 150 mm, a total table length of 1,230 mm (infeed 590 mm + outfeed 585 mm), a Ø 60 mm cutter block with 3 HSS knives at 4,500 rpm, a maximum cutting depth of 8 mm, and a 1.1 kW single-phase 230V motor. Weight 115 kg. This is a jointer only, it does not have a thicknessing function. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e jointer only (planer)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal table length:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,230 mm (590 infeed + 585 outfeed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 60 mm – 3 HSS knives – 4,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. cutting depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.1 kW S1 \/ 1.5 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 115 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SP 150 PN – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 150 PN – 230V is identical to the 400V version in everything except the power supply: single-phase 230V instead of three-phase. Same width (150 mm), same table (1,230 mm), same cutter block with 3 HSS knives, same weight (115 kg). For workshops without a three-phase system looking for a dedicated 150 mm jointer, luthiers, restorers, wood artisans who already have a separate thicknesser and work in non-industrial premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo SP 150 PN – 230V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDedicated single-phase jointer. For hobby use without a separate thicknesser, consider combined planer-thicknesser machines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLuthier \/ restorer without three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm with HSS knives and 1,230 mm table in single-phase 230V: the dedicated jointer for those working narrow pieces in workshops without three-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpentry workshop with separate thicknesser and without three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs a dedicated jointer alongside an existing thicknesser. For those with three-phase available, prefer SP 150 PN – 400V.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops with three-phase available (prefer SP 150 PN – 400V); pieces over 150 mm wide; those who also need a thicknessing function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (Planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e585 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e820 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. cutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e740 × 100 mm, inclinable 90°–45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.1 kW (1.5 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,230 × 530 × 1,180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e115 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SP 150 PN – 230V and SP 150 PN – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo constructive difference: same width, same HSS cutter block, same table, same dimensions and weight. The difference is exclusively in the power supply: single-phase 230V vs three-phase 400V. With three-phase available, the 400V version is preferable; without three-phase, the 230V is the only viable option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the SP 150 PN – 230V have a thicknessing function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is exclusively a jointer. For the combined planer-thicknesser function in single-phase, consider ADM 260 – 230V or FS 310 P – 230V.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 3 HSS knives be sharpened?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day) every 2-4 weeks on softwoods, every 1-2 weeks on hardwoods. To reduce maintenance frequency, consider the SP 150 PS – 230V with TCT inserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,230 × 530 × 1,180 mm. At 115 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack. The width of 530 mm allows positioning even in narrow workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SP 150 PN and SP 150 PS?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SP 150 PN has 3 HSS knives; the SP 150 PS has 28 TCT inserts. Same Ø 60 mm cutter block, same speed (4,500 rpm), same table, same weight. The PN has a lower purchase cost and requires periodic sharpening; the PS has a higher purchase cost but almost no maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692711842120,"sku":"08-10130","price":991.9,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_Bernardo_SP_150_PN_con_tavoli_in_ghisa_rettificata.jpg?v=1760540639"},{"product_id":"bernardo-sp-200pn-230v","title":"Bernardo SP 200 PN Jointer – 230V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 200 PN – 230V planer offers a planing width of 200 mm, a total table length of 1,805 mm (infeed 880 mm + outfeed 880 mm), a Ø 72 mm cutter block with 4 HSS knives at 4,800 rpm, a maximum cutting depth of 8 mm, and a 2.2 kW single-phase 230V motor. Weight 181 kg. This machine is a jointer only; it does not have a thicknessing function. Produced in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e Jointer only (planer)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal table:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,805 mm (880 infeed + 880 outfeed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 72 mm – 4 HSS knives – 4,800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. cutting depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.2 kW S1 \/ 3.0 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 181 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SP 200 PN – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 200 PN – 230V is identical to the 400V version in everything except the power supply: single-phase 230V instead of three-phase. Same 1,805 mm table, same cutter block with 4 HSS knives, same weight (181 kg). For joiners, restorers, and parquet manufacturers who work in workshops without a three-phase system and are looking for a dedicated jointer with a long table for pieces up to 200 mm wide. The 2.2 kW single-phase motor is sized for continuous professional use on medium woods for up to 6-7 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Italian customer assistance available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo SP 200 PN – 230V for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional jointer weighing 181 kg. For hobby use, consider lighter combined planer-thicknessers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJoiner \/ parquet manufacturer without three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,805 mm table for long boards, 200 mm width, 4 HSS knives at 4,800 rpm in single-phase 230V: the dedicated jointer for those without three-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJoinery with separate thicknesser without three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs a dedicated jointer alongside an existing thicknesser. For those with three-phase, prefer SP 200 PN – 400V or SP 200 PS.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops with available three-phase (prefer SP 200 PN – 400V or SP 200 PS); pieces over 200 mm wide; those also requiring the thicknessing function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,805 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e840 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 72 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. cutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,020 × 125 mm, inclinable 90°–45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,805 × 660 × 1,200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e181 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 HSS knives mounted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting jig\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SP 200 PN – 230V and SP 200 PN – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo structural difference: same operational specifications, same table, same cutter block, same weight. The only difference is in the power supply: single-phase 230V vs three-phase 400V. If three-phase is available, the 400V version is always preferable for more uniform motor torque; without three-phase, the 230V is the only viable option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the SP 200 PN – 230V have a thicknessing function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is exclusively a jointer. For the combined jointer+thicknesser function in single-phase at similar widths, consider the ADM 260 – 230V (250 mm) or FS 310 P – 230V (310 mm).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 4 HSS knives be sharpened?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium woods, every 2-3 weeks. On hard woods, every 1-2 weeks. To reduce maintenance frequency, consider the SP 200 PS with TCT inserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,805 × 660 × 1,200 mm. For handling long pieces, at least 2 m of free space is needed in front and behind. With 181 kg Bernardo shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the 2.2 kW single-phase motor handle continuous professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for shifts of up to 6-7 hours on medium woods. On hard woods (oak, ash), it is advisable to reduce the cutting depth to 1.5-2 mm and take short breaks every 30-45 minutes. A dedicated line with a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker of at least 16A is recommended to avoid trips during startup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692712563016,"sku":"08-10140","price":1573.85,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_Bernardo_SP_200_PN_con_tavoli_in_ghisa_rettificata..jpg?v=1760539443"},{"product_id":"bernardo-sp-200pn-400v","title":"Bernardo SP 200 PN Jointer – 400V","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 200 PN – 400V planer offers a planing width of 200 mm, a total table length of 1,805 mm (880 mm infeed + 880 mm outfeed), a Ø 72 mm cutter block with 4 HSS knives at 4,800 rpm, a maximum cutting depth of 8 mm, and a 2.2 kW three-phase 400V motor. Weight 181 kg. This machine is for surface planing only; it does not have a thicknessing function. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e surface planing only (jointer)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal table length:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,805 mm (880 infeed + 880 outfeed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 72 mm – 4 HSS knives – 4,800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. cutting depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.2 kW S1 \/ 3.0 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 181 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SP 200 PN – 400V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SP 200 PN – 400V is the version with HSS knives (4 knives, not TCT) of the three-phase SP 200: same long table of 1,805 mm, same Ø 72 mm cutter block at 4,800 rpm, same 2.2 kW motor, but with 4 HSS knives instead of the 36 TCT inserts of the SP 200 PS. \"PN\" indicates normal knives. The choice between SP 200 PN and SP 200 PS depends on the preference for cutting edge technology and intensity of use: the PN has a lower purchase cost, the PS has lower maintenance over time. For window and door manufacturers and parquet producers with separate thicknessers who value the long 1,805 mm table for long and narrow pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSP 200 PN vs SP 200 PS: which to choose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame structure, same motor, same weight (181 kg), same table (1,805 mm). The PN is fitted with 4 HSS knives, sharpening every 1-4 weeks. The PS is fitted with 36 TCT inserts, rotation every 6-10 weeks per insert. Lower purchase cost for PN; higher maintenance cost over time. For those who do not want to change technology and already have experience with HSS sharpening, the PN is the natural choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo SP 200 PN – 400V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional 181 kg jointer with three-phase. For hobby use, consider combined planer\/thicknesser machines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWindow\/door manufacturer \/ parquet producer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,805 mm table for long planks and beams, 200 mm width, 4 HSS knives at 4,800 rpm: suitable for reference surfacing on long and narrow pieces in three-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJoinery with separate thicknesser\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor those who prefer HSS knives over TCT and have three-phase available. For those who want minimal maintenance, consider SP 200 PS.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e workshops without three-phase 400V (choose SP 200 PN – 230V); pieces over 200 mm wide; those who also need a thicknessing function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer (surface planer)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutfeed table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,805 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e840 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 72 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKnives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pcs HSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. cutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,020 × 125 mm, tiltable 90°–45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,805 × 660 × 1,200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e181 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 HSS knives fitted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnife setting gauge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SP 200 PN and SP 200 PS?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SP 200 PN is fitted with 4 HSS knives; the SP 200 PS is fitted with 36 TCT inserts. Same Ø 72 mm cutter block, same speed (4,800 rpm), same table (1,805 mm), same motor, same weight (181 kg). The PN has a lower purchase cost and requires periodic sharpening; the PS has a higher purchase cost but almost no cutting edge maintenance. The choice depends on technological preference and intensity of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the SP 200 PN have a thicknessing function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is exclusively a surface planer. For the combined planer\/thicknesser function at 200 mm, the ADH 250 P – 400V or the PT 260 – 400V are the closest alternatives in terms of width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 4 HSS knives be sharpened?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (6-8 hours\/day) on medium woods, sharpening is necessary every 2-3 weeks. On hardwoods every 1-2 weeks. Original Bernardo spare knives available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,805 × 660 × 1,200 mm. For handling long workpieces, clear space of at least 2 m in front and behind is required. With 181 kg Bernardo shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between SP 200 PN – 400V and SP 200 PN – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo structural difference: same operational specifications. The only difference is the power supply: three-phase 400V vs single-phase 230V. With three-phase available, the 400V version is preferable for more uniform motor torque.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692712661320,"sku":"08-10141","price":1573.85,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_filo_Bernardo_SP_200_PN_con_tavoli_in_ghisa_rettificata.jpg?v=1760538338"},{"product_id":"bernardo-th-330-s","title":"Bernardo TH 330 S Bench Thickness Planer – 230V with Spiral Cutterblock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TH 330 S – 230V benchtop thickness planer offers a working width of 330 mm, a working height of 5–155 mm, a spiral cutterhead Ø 50 mm with 30 TCT inserts at 9,500 rpm, a maximum cutting depth of 2.8 mm, an automatic feed rate of 8 m\/min, and a 1.5 kW single-phase 230V motor. Weight approx. 30 kg. This is a benchtop thickness planer only; it does not have a jointer function. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunction:\u003c\/strong\u003e thickness planing only (benchtop)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking height (min–max):\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 155 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterhead:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 50 mm – 30 TCT inserts – 9,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax. cutting depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 kW S1 \/ 2.1 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 30 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TH 330 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo TH 330 S is the version of the TH 330 with a TCT spiral cutterhead: same portable benchtop structure (30 kg, 230V single-phase), same width (330 mm), but with 30 TCT inserts at 9,500 rpm instead of the 2 HSS knives of the standard version. The difference lies in cutting quality and maintenance: the 30 high-frequency TCT inserts produce a smoother surface compared to the 2 HSS knives and only require the insert to be rotated when worn, without sharpening. This is for those who already own the TH 330 with knives and want to upgrade the technology, or for those who directly choose the top of the 330 mm benchtop range. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used as a secondary finishing thickness planer alongside combined production planers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTH 330 S vs TH 330 (HSS): the practical difference\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TH 330 S has 30 TCT inserts at 9,500 rpm, the highest cutting frequency in the entire Bernardo planer range. This means an exceptional finish even on thin passes (0.2-0.5 mm) on fine woods. The 2 HSS knives of the standard TH 330 produce adequate quality for general use; the 30 TCT inserts of the S are appreciated for precision work on hardwoods and fine woods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo TH 330 S – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg, 230V, 330 mm with TCT at 9,500 rpm: the benchtop thickness planer with the highest finishing quality in the Bernardo catalog in a portable format.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLuthier \/ cabinetmaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 30 TCT inserts at 9,500 rpm produce exceptional surfaces on fine woods with thin passes. The finishing quality justifies the higher cost compared to the HSS version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery shop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAs a complementary finishing machine. For continuous production, the TH 330 S is not dimensioned (1.5 kW); consider DH 310 S as a dedicated professional thickness planer.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e pieces taller than 155 mm; intensive production on hardwoods beyond 3-4 hours\/day; those who also need the jointer function; pieces wider than 330 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThickness Planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 155 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable with extension\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e640 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. cutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterhead – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 pcs reversible (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterhead speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 \/ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW (2.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.1 kW (2.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e550 × 640 × 475 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and Safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between TH 330 S and TH 330 (standard)?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TH 330 S is equipped with 30 TCT inserts on the Ø 50 mm cutterhead at 9,500 rpm; the standard TH 330 is equipped with 2 HSS knives on the same cutterhead. Same structure, same motor (1.5 kW), same weight (30 kg). TCT offers superior finishing quality (more inserts, more cuts per cm), maintenance by rotating the insert without sharpening, and 10-20 times longer cutting edge life. The TH 330 S has a higher purchase cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre 9,500 rpm actually the highest in the Bernardo range?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The TH 330 and TH 330 S have the highest cutterhead speed in the Bernardo planer catalog, even higher than the SP jointers (4,500-4,800 rpm). The high speed on a small cutterhead (Ø 50 mm) produces a very high number of cuts per cm, with an exceptional finish even at sustained feed rates (8 m\/min).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the TH 330 S have a jointer function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is exclusively a thickness planer. It does not have an alignment table or a fence for jointing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a dedicated workbench required?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With a height of 475 mm, the TH 330 S should be placed on a stable bench. At 30 kg, it can be easily moved by one person and stored on any shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the 30 TCT inserts be rotated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn intermittent professional use (2-4 hours\/day), one rotation of the insert is necessary every 6-10 weeks per insert. With 30 inserts, rotation is progressive. Complete replacement only occurs when all 4 cutting edges of an insert are worn out.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692713775432,"sku":"08-10120","price":719.82,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_TH_330_S_Pialla_a_spessore_330_mm_con_albero_a_spirale.jpg?v=1757522053"},{"product_id":"bernardo-pt-260-s","title":"Bernardo PT 260 S Planer Thicknesser – 230\/400V with spiral cutter block","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 260 S jointer-planer offers a planing width of 260 mm, a jointer table of 1,050 mm, a helical cutter block Ø 55 mm with 24 TCT inserts at 6,700 rpm, a thicknessing height of 5-150 mm, a feed rate of 6 m\/min, a 1.8 kW motor available in both 230V single-phase and 400V three-phase, and an integrated dust collector with bag. Weight 89 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,050 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 55 mm helical, 24 TCT inserts, 6,700 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.8 kW S1 \/ 2.5 kW S6 – 230V single-phase or 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 89 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 260 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 260 S is a professional combined planer with a 260 mm planing width, TCT helical cutter block, semi-stationary structure, and dual power supply options. The integrated dust collector with a dust bag and the aluminum planing tables with noise-reducing slots distinguish the PT 260 S as an intermediate machine between benchtop planers and heavy stationary machines. Its 89 kg weight provides sufficient stability for daily artisan use without requiring a special foundation. The thicknessing table, guided on 4 columns, ensures uniform feeding even for heavy workpieces up to 150 mm in height. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is a typical choice for small carpentry shops (1-3 employees) looking for a compact planer with performance superior to benchtop models, offering flexibility between single-phase and three-phase power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 260 S occupies a precise position in the Bernardo range: above the single-phase PT 250\/305 S (strictly benchtop format) and below the stationary AD 260 (with longer tables, weighing 200+ kg). The difference with the PT 250 S is not only dimensional (260 vs 255 mm) but constructive: longer tables, integrated dust collector, dual power supply, higher structural weight. Compared to the PT 305 S, the PT 260 S foregoes the extra 45 mm of width but offers the advantage of an integrated dust collector and three-phase availability. The typical choice: PT 260 S for those who want a compromise between portability and professional performance at 260 mm; PT 305 S for those who prioritize maximum width in single-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). At 89 kg, it requires careful handling: using a pallet truck or two people for repositioning is recommended. Original Bernardo replacement TCT inserts, belts, and accessories are available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support is available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PT 260 S for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine designed for professional use: for purely hobbyist use, the expense might be disproportionate. Consider the lower-cost PT 250 S if a 255 mm width is sufficient.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall carpentry \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm width with integrated dust collector and dual power supply: a practical combination for artisan workshops with daily use. 1,050 mm jointer table handles medium-long workpieces.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIn the 400V three-phase version with 89 kg structural weight, it is dimensioned for prolonged shifts. For industrial production with larger widths, consider the stationary AD 260 S or the ADM range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e operations requiring a thicknessing height over 150 mm (consider the stationary range); widths over 260 mm (consider the PT 305 S at 300 mm or AD 310 at 310 mm); production with workpieces over 1.8 m requiring longer tables.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJointer table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. jointer depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e640 × 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffective thicknessing width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height (min – max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. thicknessing depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCutter block and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHelical with 24 TCT inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6,700 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 kW (2.4 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 kW (3.4 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V single-phase or 400V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,110 × 720 × 1,030 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 89 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHelical cutter block Ø 55 mm with 24 mounted TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 spare TCT inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated dust collector\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 230V or 400V version better?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 400V three-phase version is preferable if the workshop has a three-phase line available: the motor has more constant torque and better thermal management during continuous use. The 230V single-phase is the only choice for those who only have a standard domestic outlet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe practical difference is seen in intensive use: the 400V three-phase motor maintains power better on startup and manages heat better during prolonged shifts. In intermittent use, the two versions offer similar performance. For workshops with a three-phase line, there is no advantage in choosing the 230V.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the integrated dust collector replace an external dust collector?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hobbyist-artisan use, yes; for intensive professional use, it is preferable to connect an external dust collector via the Ø 75 mm port. The integrated dust collector is sized to handle chips produced during standard processing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated dust collector with bag is a practical solution for workshops that do not have fixed dust extraction systems. For resinous woods or MDF, which produce abundant fine dust, it is recommended to connect to an external dust collector like the MSA 750 or higher to better manage the air in the workshop and reduce respiratory risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference with the stationary AD 260 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe AD 260 S has longer cast iron tables (1,450 mm vs 1,050 mm) and a higher weight (approx. 200 kg). The PT 260 S is in a compact format with aluminum tables. Same width, differentiated performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive continuous use (over 6 hours daily), the AD 260 S offers greater vibrational stability; for hobby and artisan use, the aluminum tables of the PT 260 are adequate. The price difference between the two machines is significant, so the choice depends on the expected workload.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I take a 4 mm jointing cut to quickly flatten a rough board?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, the maximum jointing depth of cut is 3 mm. For removals greater than this, multiple consecutive passes with progressive adjustment of the infeed table are necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRemovals of 3 mm per pass are already substantial for a planer in this range: on hardwoods like oak or ash, it is advisable to limit to 1.5-2 mm to avoid overloading the motor and preserve surface quality. Effective planing of very warped boards always requires multiple progressive passes, regardless of the planer's power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,110 × 720 × 1,030 mm. For workpiece movement, clear space of at least 1.8 m in front and behind is needed, for a total operating area of approximately 4.5 × 1.2 m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe working height of 885 mm is optimal for operators of average height. The 89 kg weight allows placement on a standard industrial floor without special foundations. For thicknessing mode on workpieces over 1 m, a roller support on the outfeed is recommended to prevent deflection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"230 V","offer_id":50692762534216,"sku":"08-10220","price":1415.25,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"400 V","offer_id":50692762566984,"sku":"08-10230","price":1415.25,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_PT_260_S_Pialla_filo_e_spessore_con_albero_elicoidale_260_mm.jpg?v=1757512500"},{"product_id":"affilatrici-bernardo-dg-13-md","title":"Bernardo DG 13 MD Drill Bit Sharpener – 230V with thinning device","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DG 13 MD drill bit sharpener sharpens HSS and carbide twist drills with a diameter of 2-13 mm, adjustable point angle of 90°-135°, grinding wheel speed of 4,400 rpm, 0.12 kW single-phase 230V motor, and includes a CBN grinding wheel. Equipped with a thinning device and an additional station for relief grinding of the cutting edge. Weight 8.1 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSharpenable drill diameter:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 – 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable point angle:\u003c\/strong\u003e 90° – 135°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCBN grinding wheel speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4,400 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.12 kW – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunctions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Primary sharpening + thinning + relief grinding\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle:\u003c\/strong\u003e Precision ball bearings\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.1 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the DG 13 MD and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DG 13 MD is a twist drill bit sharpener with three operating stations: primary sharpening, a device for thinning the drill bit, and an additional station for relief grinding of the cutting face. Thinning reduces the web thickness of the drill bit, improving centering on the workpiece and reducing the feed force required during drilling. This feature, rare in sharpeners of this range, distinguishes the DG 13 MD from the basic DG 13 M. The CBN (cubic boron nitride) grinding wheel is the correct technical choice for sharpening HSS and carbide. In Krollit's customer workshops, it is chosen by mechanical workshops, maintenance departments, and precision mechanics who want to reduce drill bit replacement costs and improve drilling performance on steels and metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DG 13 MD is the superior version of the DG 13 M in the Bernardo drill bit sharpener range. Compared to the basic DG 13 M, the MD adds the thinning device and the relief grinding station, two functions that substantially improve the geometry of the sharpened drill bit: a properly thinned and relieved drill bit has a longer lifespan between resharpenings and produces more precise holes. Above the DG 13 MD in the Bernardo range are sharpeners for milling cutters (EMG 30, EMG 60) and universal sharpeners, sized for other types of tools. For workshops that primarily work with drill bits up to 13 mm, the DG 13 MD is the reference solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). At 8.1 kg, it is shipped in a single protective package and can be handled by one person. CBN grinding wheels, ER 20 collets, and original Bernardo spare parts are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the DG 13 MD for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor those who need to regularly sharpen their own drill bits. For occasional use (one-two sharpenings per month), the cost may be oversized: consider external sharpening services.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical workshop \/ maintenance department\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe three stations (sharpening, thinning, relief) produce drill bits with correct geometry that last longer between resharpenings. Reduces drill bit replacement costs and improves drilling performance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction department with intensive drill bit use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops with regular consumption of HSS and carbide drill bits, the DG 13 MD quickly pays for itself. Durable CBN grinding wheel and three stations make sharpening quick and repeatable.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e drill bits over 13 mm in diameter (consider higher models); CNC drills with special geometries (require numerically controlled universal sharpeners); sharpening end mills or rotary tools other than drill bits (consider EMG 30 or universal sharpeners).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSharpening capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrill bit diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 – 13 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrill bit materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHSS, HSS-Co, carbide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable point angle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 135°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating functions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePrimary sharpening + thinning + relief grinding\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGrinding wheel and spindle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding wheel type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCBN (cubic boron nitride)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding wheel speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePrecision ball bearings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.12 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – 50Hz – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 135 × 165 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.1 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/CE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounted CBN grinding wheel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet of 11 ER 20 collets (3.0 \/ 4.0 \/ 5.0 \/ 6.0 \/ 7.0 \/ 8.0 \/ 9.0 \/ 10.0 \/ 11.0 \/ 12.0 \/ 13.0 mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eER 20 collet holder\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between DG 13 MD and DG 13 M?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DG 13 MD adds the thinning device and the relief grinding station for the cutting face. The basic DG 13 M only offers primary sharpening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinning reduces the web thickness of the drill bit, improving centering on the workpiece and reducing the required feed force. Relief grinding creates the correct clearance angle behind the cutting edge. These two functions produce drill bits with complete geometry and superior performance, which is why the DG 13 MD is preferred in professional mechanical workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I sharpen carbide drill bits?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The included CBN grinding wheel is the correct technical choice for both HSS and carbide. CBN is specific for steels and ferrous alloys, while for carbide, diamond grinding wheels are normally preferred, but CBN is still suitable for occasional resharpening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops with intensive use of carbide drill bits, an optional diamond grinding wheel is available, which provides optimal results on carbide. For HSS and HSS-Co drill bits, the CBN grinding wheel is the correct choice in all cases. Original Bernardo replacement grinding wheels are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long does it take to sharpen a drill bit?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eComplete sharpening of an HSS drill bit (operations: primary sharpening + thinning + relief) typically takes 1-3 minutes for drill bits under 10 mm and 3-5 minutes for drill bits 10-13 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTimes depend on the initial condition of the drill bit: a slightly worn drill bit only requires primary sharpening (~1 minute), while a worn or damaged drill bit requires all three stations (~3-5 minutes). With practice, an operator achieves fast and repeatable times. The included ER 20 collets allow for precise clamping of drill bits in standard sizes 3-13 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the DG 13 MD work with a 230V household socket?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 0.12 kW 230V single-phase motor works with any standard 16A household socket. Power consumption is minimal, equivalent to that of a small appliance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DG 13 MD is designed for benchtop use with low power consumption: it can be installed in any workshop or laboratory without the need for dedicated lines. Its compact dimensions (280 × 135 × 165 mm) and weight of 8.1 kg allow it to be placed on any workbench.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I sharpen drill bits over 13 mm with the DG 13 MD?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The design limit is 13 mm drill bit diameter. For drill bits of larger diameter, consider universal sharpeners with an extended range, or external sharpening services for large diameter drill bits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 13 mm limit coincides with the maximum size of the included ER 20 collet set. Drill bits over 13 mm are typically used less frequently in general workshops, and their sharpening is often outsourced. The DG 13 MD covers the range of drill bits used in virtually all standard drilling applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693010391368,"sku":"05-1613","price":686.88,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Affilatrice_Bernardo_DG_13_MD_per_punte_da_trapano.jpg?v=1758707426"},{"product_id":"cesoie-idrauliche-bernardo-hps-60","title":"Bernardo HPS 60 Hydraulic Profile Shear – 60 tons, multi-function","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HPS 60 hydraulic profile shear offers 60 tons of punching force, drilling capacity of Ø 25 mm on 16 mm thickness (expandable to Ø 50 mm with accessories), steel flat bar cutting up to 16 × 330 mm, angle sections 125 × 125 × 12 mm at 90°, round bars Ø 45 mm and square bars 40 × 40 mm, 4 kW motor, 8 strokes\/min. Integrated notching station up to 16 mm. Weight 1,600 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePunching force:\u003c\/strong\u003e 60 tons\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandard drilling:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 25 mm on 16 mm thickness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel flat bar cutting:\u003c\/strong\u003e 16 × 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAngle section cutting (90°):\u003c\/strong\u003e 125 × 125 × 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOperating stations:\u003c\/strong\u003e Punching, flat bar cutting, profile cutting, bar cutting, notching\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 kW – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,600 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HPS 60 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HPS 60 is the entry-professional range multi-function hydraulic profile shear in the Bernardo HPS (Hydraulic Profile Shears) lineup. It combines five operating stations in one machine: punching, flat bar cutting, angle section cutting, round and square bar cutting, and rectangular\/triangular notching. The 60-ton punching force is dimensioned for standard holes up to Ø 25 mm on 16 mm thickness, expandable up to Ø 50 mm with optional accessories. In Krollit customer workshops, it is chosen by small to medium-sized metal fabricators, artistic blacksmiths, gate and railing manufacturing workshops, and maintenance companies who prefer to consolidate five distinct operations into one compact machine instead of purchasing five separate pieces of equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the HPS range, the HPS 60 occupies the entry-level segment: below it is the HPS 45 (45 tons, 1,000 kg) for workshops with lower requirements, above it is the HPS 90 (90 tons, 2,500 kg) for heavy industrial applications with drilling capacity up to Ø 30 mm on 20 mm. The choice between HPS 45, 60, and 90 depends on the typical work in the workshop: maximum thicknesses habitually drilled, maximum size of angle profiles, and frequency of operations. The HPS 60 with 60 tons covers the vast majority of light and medium fabrication needs. All HPS models share the multi-function philosophy and the five stations; only the maximum capacities of each station vary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). At 1,600 kg, it requires adequate lifting equipment for unloading (forklift or crane). Verify access to the workshop before delivery. Original Bernardo spare blades, punches, dies, and accessories available from stock with 3-5 working day shipping. Italian customer assistance available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HPS 60 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial machine designed for professional use. Cost, weight (1,600 kg), and 400V three-phase power make it unsuitable for hobbyist use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall\/medium fabrication (up to 5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe five operating stations consolidate operations that would require separate equipment into one machine. The 60-ton force covers standard fabrication work on profiles and flat bars up to 16 mm.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor thicknesses over 16 mm or angle profiles over 125 × 125 × 12, consider the HPS 90 with 90 tons. The HPS 60 is dimensioned for standard daily work, not for continuous heavy industrial cycles.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e applications with drilling thickness over 16 mm in standard mode (consider HPS 90); working with stainless steel or high-strength special steels (requires specific sizing, contact Krollit); hot forging or deep drawing operations (machine dedicated to cold cutting and punching).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePunching Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunching Force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 tons\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. Punchable Thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard Hole Diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. Hole Diameter (with optional accessories)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunch Stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStrokes\/min (20 mm stroke)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 cpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat Depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSteel Flat Bar Cutting Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. Steel Flat Bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat Bar Blade Length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAngle Profile Cutting Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle Profiles 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 × 125 × 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle Profiles 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 × 50 × 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eU \/ I Profiles (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e126 × 53 × 5.5 mm \/ 126 × 74 × 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT Profiles (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 × 125 × 12 mm \/ 60 × 60 × 8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBar Cutting Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound Bars\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 45 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare Bars\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNotching Station\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. Notching Thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRectangular Notching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e57 × 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTriangular Notching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 × 5 × 7.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – 50Hz – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine Dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,640 × 730 × 1,770 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,600 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking Heights\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunching Working Height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e970 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat Bar Working Height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBar Working Height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNotching Working Height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e910 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHPS 60 hydraulic shear with five integrated operating stations\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and maintenance manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated standard safety set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I work with sheet metal on the HPS 60?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HPS 60 is designed for structural steel profiles and flat bars, not for thin sheet metal. For sheet metal, consider dedicated guillotine shears (Bernardo CSM range or similar).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe flat bar cutting of the HPS 60 is optimized for thicknesses of 5-16 mm, typical of metal fabrication. For thin sheet metal (1-3 mm), the blade geometry of the HPS 60 is not suitable: it produces a rough cut with burrs. For mixed sheet metal + profile work, it is recommended to have a separate guillotine shear for sheet metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require and what is its consumption?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HPS 60 requires a 400V three-phase power supply with a 4 kW motor. It needs a dedicated industrial line with adequate circuit breaker protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4 kW consumption requires installation on an industrial panel. For workshops already equipped with other professional machines (presses, lathes, milling machines), the HPS 60 can be added to the existing line without problems. For workshops with only single-phase or domestic three-phase power, the HPS 60 cannot be installed: a commercial\/industrial meter is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I make holes larger than Ø 25 mm?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, with optional accessories (dedicated die and punch), the capacity increases to Ø 50 mm. The standard nominal capacity is Ø 25 mm on 16 mm thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing the hole diameter proportionally reduces the maximum workable thickness: for holes Ø 30-40 mm, the maximum thickness is reduced to 12-14 mm; for holes Ø 50 mm, it typically drops to 8-10 mm maximum thickness. Original Bernardo spare punches and dies are available from stock with 3-5 working day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much operating space does it require in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,640 × 730 × 1,770 mm. The minimum recommended operating area for standard operations is 4 × 3 m, considering space for moving long profiles during cutting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1,640 mm machine width must be supplemented with space to handle the workpieces: for profiles 6 meters long (standard supply), an entry space of at least 7 meters is needed. Working heights vary by station (910-1,185 mm), all ergonomic for standing operators.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many operations per minute can I perform?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e8 strokes\/min with a 20 mm piston stroke. The actual capacity depends on the part positioning time: in repetitive operations on pre-marked parts, 4-6 effective operations per minute can be achieved.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe speed of 8 strokes\/min is dimensioned for intensive continuous use without overheating the hydraulic system. For operations requiring faster cycles (series production with automatic positioners), consider hydraulic shears with servo controls and CNC positioning, typically in a higher price range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693012619592,"sku":"06-1623XL","price":12542.03,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Cesoia_idraulica_Bernardo_HPS_60_per_profilati_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1759222671"},{"product_id":"cesoie-idrauliche-bernardo-hps-90","title":"Bernardo HPS 90 Hydraulic Section Shear – 90 tons, industrial multifunction","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HPS 90 hydraulic ironworker offers 90 tons of punching force, drilling capacity of Ø 30 mm on 20 mm thick material (expandable to Ø 50 mm with accessories), flat steel cutting up to 20 × 330 mm, angle sections 140 × 140 × 12 mm at 90°, round bars Ø 50 mm and square bars 50 × 50 mm, 5.5 kW motor, 6 strokes\/min. Integrated notching station up to 20 mm. Weight 2,500 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePunching force:\u003c\/strong\u003e 90 tons\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandard drilling:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 30 mm on 20 mm thickness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlat steel cutting:\u003c\/strong\u003e 20 × 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAngle section cutting (90°):\u003c\/strong\u003e 140 × 140 × 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOperating stations:\u003c\/strong\u003e Punching, flat bar cutting, section cutting, bar cutting, notching\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.5 kW – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2,500 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HPS 90 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HPS 90 is the heavy-duty industrial multifunction hydraulic ironworker in the HPS range. With 90 tons of punching force and a drilling capacity of Ø 30 mm on 20 mm thick material, it covers processes that the HPS 60 cannot handle. The five operating stations (punching, flat bar cutting, section cutting, bar cutting, notching) are dimensioned for daily industrial cycles on heavy structural steel. The 2,500 kg structural weight provides the necessary stability for operations on angle sections up to 140 × 140 × 12 mm and bars up to Ø 50 mm. In the workshops of Krollit's customers, it is chosen by industrial metal fabricators, steel structure construction workshops, metal prefabrication companies, and foundries with in-house fabrication departments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the HPS range, the HPS 90 is the industrial-grade model: above the HPS 60 (60 tons, standard operations) and the HPS 45 (45 tons, entry-level). The difference with the HPS 60 is not only in tonnage (90 vs 60) but in overall sizing: more powerful motor (5.5 vs 4 kW), greater weight (2,500 vs 1,600 kg), greater capacities in all stations. The speed of 6 strokes\/min (vs 8 for the HPS 60) reflects the sizing for thicker materials: each stroke requires more hydraulic energy. For workshops with industrial volumes and the need to drill 20 mm regularly, the HPS 90 is the correct choice; the HPS 60 would be undersized and would wear out quickly under these conditions of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). At 2,500 kg, it requires a crane or forklift of adequate capacity for unloading. Check workshop access and flooring before delivery. Original Bernardo spare blades, punches, dies, and accessories are available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support is available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the HPS 90 is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy industrial machine. Cost, weight (2,500 kg), and sizing are unsuitable for hobby use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall\/medium fabrication shop (up to 10 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor standard daily use, the HPS 60 is sufficient. The HPS 90 is only justified if thicknesses over 16 mm or sections over 125 × 125 × 12 mm are regularly processed.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial fabrication \/ steel structure production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 90 tons and drilling capacity of Ø 30 on 20 mm are sized for heavy industrial work. The 2,500 kg structure handles intensive cycles without vibration.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e applications with drilling thickness over 20 mm in standard mode (consider dedicated industrial presses); high-cadence series production with automatic positioning (consider CNC ironworkers); occasional work on small pieces (the HPS 60 is more economical and correctly sized).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePunching capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunching force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 tons\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. punchable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard hole diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. hole diameter (with optional accessories)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunch stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStrokes\/min (20 mm stroke)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 cpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e355 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFlat steel cutting capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. flat steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat bar blade length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e485 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAngle section cutting capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle sections 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 × 140 × 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle sections 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 × 50 × 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eU \/ I sections (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 × 60 × 6.5 mm \/ 160 × 86 × 6 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT sections (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 × 140 × 12 mm \/ 70 × 70 × 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBar cutting capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound bars\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare bars\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 × 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNotching station\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. notching thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRectangular notch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e57 × 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTriangular notch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 × 5 × 7.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – 50Hz – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,860 × 800 × 1,900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2,500 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking heights\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunching working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,020 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat bar working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e910 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBar working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNotching working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e915 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHPS 90 hydraulic ironworker with five integrated operating stations\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and maintenance manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated standard safety set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the HPS 90 make sense for a small workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly if thicknesses over 16 mm or angle sections over 125 × 125 × 12 mm are regularly processed. For standard light\/medium fabrication work, the HPS 60 is correctly sized and costs significantly less.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe price difference between the HPS 60 and HPS 90 is significant. The HPS 90 is justified for workshops that habitually work with heavy structural steel, large-section angle profiles, or flat bars 18-20 mm thick. For mixed use with a prevalence of 5-16 mm thicknesses, the HPS 60 is the logical choice even for professional workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I expand the drilling capacity beyond Ø 30 mm?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, with optional accessories, the capacity increases to Ø 50 mm. The standard nominal capacity is Ø 30 mm on 20 mm thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor Ø 35-50 mm holes, the maximum workable thickness is proportionally reduced: typically Ø 50 mm is achieved on 12-15 mm thicknesses. Original Bernardo spare punches and dies are available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. For non-standard holes, custom supply is available through Bernardo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply and electrical line is needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e400V three-phase power supply with a 5.5 kW motor. Requires a dedicated industrial line with an adequate electrical panel and thermal-magnetic protection sized for the motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe inrush current of the 5.5 kW motor can reach sustained peaks: the electrical panel must correctly handle the starting currents. For workshops not yet equipped with an industrial panel, a qualified electrician must be involved for installation. Krollit does not provide on-site electrical service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install it?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,860 × 800 × 1,900 mm. The minimum recommended operating area is 5 × 3.5 m, considering space for moving standard 6-meter profiles during cutting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 2,500 kg weight requires an adequately thick reinforced concrete industrial floor: light or screed flooring is not dimensioned. For 6 m long profiles, at least 7 meters of entry space is needed. Working heights vary between 910 and 1,220 mm depending on the station, ergonomic for standing operators.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow fast is it in production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e6 strokes\/min with a 20 mm stroke. In actual production, with workpiece positioning times, 3-5 operations per minute can be achieved in repetitive work on pre-marked pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe slower speed compared to the HPS 60 (6 vs 8 cpm) is due to the longer working stroke required to generate 90 tons of force. For high-cadence series production, consider numerically controlled presses with servo drives, sized for rapid automated cycles. The HPS 90 is optimized for high-capacity work at a moderate pace, typical of industrial fabrication.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693013832008,"sku":"06-1624XL","price":13884.08,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Cesoia_idraulica_Bernardo_HPS_90_per_profilati_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1759223254"},{"product_id":"cesoie-idrauliche-bernardo-hps-45","title":"Bernardo HPS 45 hydraulic profile shear – 45 tons, multifunctional","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HPS 45 hydraulic shear for profiles offers a punching force of 45 tonnes, drilling capacity of Ø 22 mm on 12 mm thick material (expandable to Ø 40 mm with accessories), steel plate cutting up to 12 × 330 mm, angle profiles 100 × 100 × 10 mm at 90°, round bars Ø 30 mm and square bars 30 × 30 mm, 3 kW motor, 8 strokes\/min. Weight 1,000 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePunching force:\u003c\/strong\u003e 45 tonnes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandard drilling:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 22 mm on 12 mm thickness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel plate cutting:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 × 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAngle profile cutting (90°):\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 × 100 × 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOperating stations:\u003c\/strong\u003e Punching, plate cutting, profile cutting, bar cutting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 kW – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,000 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HPS 45 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo HPS 45 is the entry-level multi-functional hydraulic shear in the HPS range, designed for workshops with light fabrication needs. With 45 tonnes of punching force and a drilling capacity of Ø 22 mm on 12 mm thick material, it covers standard operations for blacksmiths, manufacturers of railings, gates, and light structures. The four integrated operating stations (punching, plate cutting, profile cutting, bar cutting) replace separate shears and drills, concentrating operations that would require multiple pieces of equipment into a 1,000 kg structural weight. In Krollit's customers' workshops, it is chosen by artisan blacksmiths, light fabrication workshops, maintenance companies, and workshops primarily working with structural steels up to 12 mm thick.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the HPS range, the HPS 45 is the entry-level model: above it are the HPS 60 (60 tonnes, 1,600 kg) for more demanding work, and the HPS 90 (90 tonnes, 2,500 kg) for heavy industrial applications. The HPS 45 stands out for its compactness\/capacity ratio: a structural weight of 1,000 kg and dimensions of 1,200 × 520 × 1,500 mm make it suitable for workshops where the HPS 60 would require too much space. The Ø 22 on 12 mm drilling capacity covers the vast majority of artisanal needs but does not handle heavy industrial thicknesses. The choice between HPS 45 and HPS 60 depends on the maximum thickness regularly processed: up to 12 mm, the HPS 45 is correctly sized; beyond that, it is preferable to upgrade to the HPS 60.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). At 1,000 kg, it requires adequate lifting equipment for unloading (forklift or crane). Verify laboratory access before delivery. Original Bernardo spare blades, punches, dies, and accessories available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HPS 45 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial machine sized for professional use. Cost, 1,000 kg weight, and 400V three-phase power make it unsuitable for occasional hobby use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan blacksmith \/ light fabrication workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFour stations in one compact machine. Adequate capacity for standard work on railings, gates, light structures on steel up to 12 mm thick. The 1,000 kg weight is the lightest in the HPS range.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\/industrial fabrication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor regular work over 12 mm thick, consider the HPS 60 with 60 tonnes. The HPS 45 is sized for entry-professional use, not for daily industrial cycles on significant thicknesses.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing with drilling thickness over 12 mm in standard mode (consider HPS 60); angle profiles over 100 × 100 × 10 mm at 90° (HPS 60 or HPS 90); high-volume serial production with automation (dedicated CNC shears).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePunching Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunching force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 tonnes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax drillable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard hole diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax hole diameter (with optional accessories)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunch stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStrokes\/min (20 mm stroke)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 cpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSteel Plate Cutting Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax steel plates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlate blade length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e318 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAngle Profile Cutting Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle profiles 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 100 × 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle profiles 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 × 70 × 6 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eU \/ I profiles (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 × 45 × 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT profiles (optional)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 100 × 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBar Cutting Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound bars\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare bars\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 × 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – 50Hz – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,200 × 520 × 1,500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,000 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking Heights\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePunching working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e955 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlate working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e940 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBar working height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHPS 45 hydraulic shear with integrated operating stations\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUser and maintenance manual\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated standard safety set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between HPS 45 and HPS 60?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HPS 45 is sized for thicknesses up to 12 mm and holes Ø 22 mm; the HPS 60 handles up to 16 mm thickness and Ø 25 mm drilling. Force is 45 vs 60 tonnes, weight 1,000 vs 1,600 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe choice depends on typical work. For an artisan blacksmith mainly working with steel up to 10-12 mm, the HPS 45 is correctly sized. For fabrication shops regularly working with 14-16 mm or angle profiles up to 125 × 125 × 12 mm, the HPS 60 is the logical choice. The price difference is significant: for non-intensive use on limited thicknesses, the HPS 45 is economically preferable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I drill up to Ø 40 mm with accessories?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, with optional punches and dies, the drilling capacity increases to Ø 40 mm. The workable thickness reduces proportionally: typically Ø 35-40 mm can be achieved on 6-8 mm thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe nominal capacity is Ø 22 mm on 12 mm thickness. For non-standard holes, dedicated punches and dies are available as optional accessories. For workshops that regularly make large holes, it is recommended to check if the HPS 60 (Ø 25 standard, Ø 50 with accessories) is more suitable. Original Bernardo replacement punches and dies are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it work on a domestic three-phase system (condominium cabin)?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the available power at the meter. The 3 kW motor ideally requires an industrial meter; on domestic three-phase systems (typically 6 kW), it can work but with limitations if other machines are in simultaneous use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 3 kW starting current can reach peaks that trip the safety breaker on undersized meters. For workshops without industrial power supply, it is recommended to check system compatibility with a qualified electrician. For continuous intensive use, a dedicated commercial or industrial meter is recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install it?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,200 × 520 × 1,500 mm. For handling standard 6-meter profiles, an operating space of at least 4 × 2.5 m with side access for long bars is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1,000 kg requires a stable industrial floor but not a special foundation. The HPS 45 is the most compact in the HPS range, and its 1,200 × 520 mm geometry makes it installable in small to medium-sized workshops. Working heights of 940-1,150 mm are ergonomic for standing operators.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use the same machine for thin sheet metal?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, the HPS 45 is designed for plates and profiles of 4-12 mm thickness typical of fabrication. For thin sheet metal (under 3 mm), the cut would be rough with burrs: use dedicated guillotine shears.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe blades of the HPS 45 are geometrically optimized for typical light\/medium fabrication thicknesses. On thin sheet metal (1-2 mm), the machine works but with unsatisfactory aesthetic results. For mixed workshops also working with thin sheet metal, it is recommended to have a separate guillotine shear in addition to the HPS 45.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693014716744,"sku":"06-1621XL","price":8332.88,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Cesoia_idraulica_Bernardo_HPS_45_per_profili_in_acciaio.jpg?v=1759220851"},{"product_id":"bernardo-shrinker-stretcher-ss-40-p","title":"Bernardo SS 40 P Sheet Metal Shrinker and Stretcher – manual, 40 mm throat","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SS 40 P manual shrinker and stretcher for sheet metal offers capacity on steel (400 N\/mm²) up to 1.2 mm, aluminum capacity up to 1.5 mm, a throat depth of 40 mm, and a compact steel structure. Two included attachments (one for shrinking, one for stretching) eliminate the need to change tools. Weight 2.7 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel capacity (400 N\/mm²):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.2 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminum capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1.5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThroat depth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFunctions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Shrinking (compression) + Stretching (elongation)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOperation:\u003c\/strong\u003e Manual lever\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 2.7 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SS 40 P and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SS 40 P Shrinker and Stretcher is a compact and lightweight piece of equipment for shrinking and stretching thin sheet metal, designed for hobbyists, car restorers, artisanal body shops, and small workshops that work with panels, curved edges, and profiles. The shrinking action compresses the sheet metal, concentrating the material, useful for closing curves; the stretching action elongates it, distributing it, useful for opening curves. The two interchangeable attachments included (one shrinker, one stretcher) eliminate tool changeover times. The 1.2 mm capacity on mild steel and 1.5 mm on aluminum covers virtually all historical and modern car bodywork, light sheet metal covers, and artisanal work on copper and brass up to 1.5 mm. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is typically chosen by vintage car restorers, tinsmiths, and metal hobbyists who work with small pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Bernardo Shrinker\/Stretcher range, the SS 40 P is the entry-level model for manual use: compact, lightweight (2.7 kg), with a 40 mm throat depth. Above it, the range includes Shrinker\/Stretchers with greater throat depths (60-100 mm) and heavy-duty lever or pneumatic versions for professional workshops. The 40 mm throat depth of the SS 40 P is its main limitation: it can only process small pieces or the perimeter areas of larger pieces. For restoring side windshields, rear fenders, and car panels, the SS 40 P is correctly sized; for larger pieces or deep internal work, consider models with a larger throat depth. The tool is ergonomically designed to be fixed to a workbench: the mounting holes in the base allow for attachment with standard bolts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). At 2.7 kg, it is shipped in a single protective package and can be handled and installed by one person without equipment. Original Bernardo spare parts (shrinking and stretching jaws, lever) available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SS 40 P for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist \/ restorer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact, economical tool, perfect for light sheet metal restoration and occasional work. Two included attachments cover both functions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisanal body shop \/ tinsmith\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for finishing work on small parts. For large parts or professional production, consider models with 60-100 mm throat depth.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional bodywork production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 40 mm throat depth and manual operation are sized for occasional use, not for intensive production of large parts.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e working on sheet metal over 1.2 mm steel or 1.5 mm aluminum (the structure is not sized for this); pieces requiring a throat depth greater than 40 mm (centers of large panels); professional production at an intensive pace (consider models with heavy-duty lever or pneumatic operation).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel capacity (strength 400 N\/mm²)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminum capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFunctions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShrinking + Stretching (interchangeable attachments)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 2.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 Shrinker attachment (compression)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 Stretcher attachment (elongation)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use the SS 40 P on stainless steel?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard stainless steel (typical strength 500-600 N\/mm²) requires more compression\/stretching force than mild steel. The SS 40 P is sized for mild steel 400 N\/mm² up to 1.2 mm: on stainless steel, the practical limit drops to approximately 0.8-1.0 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo's technical specifications refer to mild steel with a strength of 400 N\/mm². Stronger steels (high-strength, stainless steel) reduce the workable thickness proportionally to their strength. For predominant use on stainless steel, it is recommended to verify with practical tests on scrap material before working on important pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between shrinking and stretching?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShrinking compresses the sheet metal, concentrating the material (useful for closing convex curves). Stretching elongates the sheet metal, distributing it over a larger surface (useful for opening concave curves or creating domed shapes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two processes are complementary in bodywork restoration: shrinking is typically used on edges that tend to open during shaping, stretching on internal areas that need to take on a three-dimensional curved shape. The SS 40 P includes both interchangeable attachments, avoiding the need to purchase two separate machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it need to be fixed to a workbench or can it be used freely?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt must be fixed to a stable workbench using bolts in the mounting holes of the base. Manual lever operation requires stability to exert the necessary force.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFree use of the machine without fixing is impractical: the force exerted on the lever would require holding the machine with one hand and operating with the other, which is not an ergonomic and precise condition. Workbench fixing is simple (4 standard bolts) and allows for two-handed work (one on the workpiece, one on the lever).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often should the shrinker\/stretcher jaws be replaced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn hobbyist-craft use, the jaws last many years without replacement. In intensive professional use, they may require replacement after several thousand operations to maintain cutting precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal Bernardo jaws are made of hardened steel and sized for prolonged use. The sign that it is time to replace them is a loss of effectiveness in the compression (shrinking) or stretching action, typically accompanied by a worsening of the finish on the sheet metal. Original Bernardo replacement jaws are available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I also work with copper and brass with the SS 40 P?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, copper and brass (softer than steel) can be worked up to thicknesses greater than the steel limit: typically up to 1.5-2 mm on copper, up to 1.5 mm on brass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSoft non-ferrous metals (copper, brass, aluminum) require less force for shrinking and stretching than steel. The SS 40 P is well suited for artistic and restoration work on these materials, common in modeling, applied art, and restoration of antique objects. The nominal Bernardo capacity refers to mild steel; other metals are handled with a safety margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693016617288,"sku":"06-1104","price":592.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Shrinker_e_Stretcher_Bernardo_SS_40_P_gola_40_mm.jpg?v=1758278385"},{"product_id":"bernardo-fresatrice-banco-bfm-2100-servo","title":"Bernardo BFM 2100 Servo Bed Milling Machine – 2,100×500 mm table, ISO 50, 3-axis digital display","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo BFM 2100 Servo bed milling machine offers a 2,100×500 mm table with a 1,800 kg load capacity, ISO 50 spindle taper, 6-300\/30-1,500 rpm spindle speed in two ranges, X\/Y\/Z travel of 1,500\/650\/650 mm, continuous servo-assisted feeds X\/Y 2.5-3,000 mm\/min and rapid traverses of 6,000 mm\/min, ball screws on all axes, 11 kW main motor, 3.6 kW feed motor, 360° swiveling Huron type universal head, and ES-12 H 3-axis digital display. Approx. weight 7,300 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWork table:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2,100 × 500 mm – load capacity 1,800 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle taper:\u003c\/strong\u003e ISO 50\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6-300 \/ 30-1,500 rpm (2 ranges)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eX \/ Y \/ Z travel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,500 \/ 650 \/ 650 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRapid traverses X\/Y\/Z:\u003c\/strong\u003e 6,000 \/ 6,000 \/ 3,000 mm\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMain motor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 11 kW – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 7,300 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BFM 2100 Servo and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo BFM 2100 Servo is a heavy industrial bed milling machine designed for heavy-duty machining of large workpieces. The massive gray cast iron structure, reinforced box-type carriage, and 7,300 kg weight provide the necessary rigidity for heavy milling without vibration. The 360° swiveling Huron-type universal head allows for horizontal, vertical, and angular milling in one machine. Servo-assisted feeds on all three axes (with rapid traverses up to 6,000 mm\/min on X\/Y), ball screws, and the ES-12 H digital display make the machine suitable for both precision machining and heavy roughing. In Krollit customer workshops, it is chosen by industrial mechanical workshops, mold shops, ship repair, and maintenance of large-format mechanical components that require generous load capacity and travel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BFM 2100 Servo is at the top of Bernardo's bed milling machine range. The ISO 50 spindle taper is the standard industrial size for heavy milling (vs ISO 40 for mid-range milling machines): it allows for larger diameter tools and more aggressive material removal tolerances. The X\/Y\/Z travels of 1,500\/650\/650 mm handle workpieces that smaller workshop milling machines could not accommodate, such as mechanical carpentry components, welded structures, and large-format molds. Below the BFM 2100 Servo, Bernardo offers milling machines with tables of 1,300-1,700 mm and ISO 40, sized for medium-sized workshops. Above the 2100 Servo, one enters the category of CNC machining centers and gantry milling machines, sized for automated production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South of Italy). With 7,300 kg, it requires a crane or forklift of adequate capacity and appropriately sized workshop access. A reinforced concrete foundation is recommended for precision machining. Clamps, milling tool holders, Huron head spare parts, and original Bernardo spare accessories are available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BFM 2100 Servo for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial machine weighing 7,300 kg, 11 kW motor, and 2,100 mm table. Its cost, dimensions, and the required industrial three-phase electrical line make it unsuitable for hobby use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium-large mechanical workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor machining large workpieces (mechanical components, carpentry, molds), repairs, and industrial maintenance. The 1,800 kg table load capacity handles practically any generalist mechanical workshop component.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndustrial production \/ mold shop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eServo-assisted feeds, ball screws, and a 3-axis digital display support precision machining on large workpieces. For automated series production, consider CNC machining centers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e automated series production with numerical control (consider dedicated CNC machining centers); workshops without an industrial three-phase line or without space for a dedicated foundation; machining small workpieces (under 200×200 mm) where more compact milling machines would be more productive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and working capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2,100 × 500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,800 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle – column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle – table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0 – 650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle and head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eISO 50\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (range 1)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 – 300 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed (range 2)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 – 1,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle head inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e360° (Huron universal head)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTravels and feeds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLongitudinal travel (X)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCross travel (Y)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical travel (Z)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e650 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous feeds X\/Y\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 – 3,000 mm\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous feed Z\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 – 2,500 mm\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRapid traverses X\/Y\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6,000 mm\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRapid traverse Z\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3,000 mm\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotors and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e11 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.6 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – 50Hz – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3,350 × 2,800 × 2,830 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 7,300 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eES-12 H 3-axis digital display with LCD screen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElectronic handwheels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContinuous servo-assisted feeds on all axes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBall screws on all axes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLED work lamp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCooling device with tank and pump\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e360° swiveling Huron type universal head\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHorizontal counter bearing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLong arbor ISO 50 \/ 32 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapered milling tool holder ISO 50 \/ 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eZ-axis telescopic cover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUniversal protective device\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCover for horizontal milling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAutomatic central lubrication\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat foundation does the BFM 2100 Servo require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA reinforced concrete foundation sized for the machine's 7,300 kg is recommended. For precision machining, standard industrial flooring may be insufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCorrect installation requires a reinforced concrete slab at least 200 mm thick under the machine, with a leveled surface for stable support on the adjustable feet. For precision machining with tight tolerances, a dedicated foundation isolated from the rest of the workshop floor reduces vibrational transmissions from other machines. Krollit does not provide on-site foundation laying services: involve a qualified installer for site preparation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use standard ISO 40 tools with an adapter?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, reduction milling tool holders from ISO 50 to ISO 40 are available to use mid-range tools. The machine is natively sized for ISO 50 but supports adapters for smaller tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReduction milling tool holders allow flexibility in using tools purchased for previous machines. However, to maximize the capacity of the BFM 2100 Servo, the native use of ISO 50 tools is preferable: ISO 50 milling tool holders have greater rigidity and allow more aggressive material removal without vibrations. Clamps and original spare milling tool holders are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 360° Huron head really practical?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It allows horizontal, vertical, and angular milling without changing tools. For general workshops that process different workpieces, this is the most significant practical difference compared to milling machines with a fixed head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Huron universal head is a heavy construction feature: it adds mechanical complexity but eliminates the need to purchase additional equipment for horizontal milling. Continuous 360° rotation also allows for complex angular milling (e.g., inclined surfaces, angled grooves) that would otherwise require the use of rotary or angular tables. The investment in a Huron head pays off in general workshops with a variety of operations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDo ball screws really make a difference?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, significantly. They reduce axial play to practically zero and allow positioning repeatability of a few microns, compared to the hundredths of a millimeter typical of traditional lead screws\/nuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBall screws are the standard for modern precision machine tools. On a milling machine of this size, the difference is seen in the achievable tolerances and the reduction of backlash, which would otherwise require manual compensation. Combined with the ES-12 H 3-axis digital display, they allow working with tolerances within ±0.01 mm under standard conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much operating space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 3,350 × 2,800 × 2,830 mm. For workpiece handling and service accessibility, an operating area of at least 6 × 5 m with a minimum ceiling height of 3.5 m is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe X-travel of 1,500 mm and the table load capacity of 1,800 kg require space for handling heavy workpieces with a hoist or workshop crane. For loading\/unloading operations, it is recommended to have at least 1.5 m clear space in front of the table. The indicated heights consider the machine with the Huron head in the vertical position: in the horizontal configuration, the vertical footprint is reduced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693018714440,"sku":"02-1323XL","price":72982.49,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Fresatrice_a_banco_Bernardo_BFM_2100_Servo_con_display_digitale_a_3_assi.jpg?v=1758120978"},{"product_id":"smussatrici-bernardo-kfm-100k","title":"Bernardo KFM 100 K Circular Chamfering Machine – 230V, chamfer adjustment 0-4 mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KFM 100 K circular chamfering machine is a lightweight handheld tool for deburring, chamfering, and radiusing steel, stainless steel, plastic, and non-ferrous metals. It features a 45° milling head with 2 TiN-coated carbide inserts, continuously adjustable chamfer from 0 to 4 mm in 0.1 mm increments, a minimum internal radius of 20 mm, a speed of 10,000 rpm, and a 720 W single-phase 230V motor. Weight 3.5 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChamfer Angle:\u003c\/strong\u003e Fixed 45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChamfer Width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0 – 4 mm adjustable (0.1 mm increments)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMinimum Internal Radius:\u003c\/strong\u003e 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutting Inserts:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 TiN-coated inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpeed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 720 W – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 3.5 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the KFM 100 K and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KFM 100 K is a compact handheld chamfering machine for the quick removal of sharp edges, cutting burrs, and dangerous corners on metal parts of various shapes. The fixed 45° angle is standard for typical mechanical engineering chamfering, while the continuous adjustment of the chamfer width from 0-4 mm in 0.1 mm increments allows for precise finish control. Its ability to work on internal radii up to 20 mm distinguishes it from fixed bench chamfering machines. The TiN-coated carbide inserts ensure superior durability compared to standard inserts and a clean finish on steel, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and plastic. In Krollit customer workshops, it is chosen by mechanical workshops for post-cutting finishing, metal fabricators for chamfering edges for welding, and laboratories working on safety-critical metal parts where burrs are unacceptable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Bernardo chamfering machine range, the KFM 100 K is the entry-level model for manual use at 45°. The KFM 200 M chamfering machines (with linear guide) in the same range offer a chamfer width up to 10 mm and angle adjustment from 15°-45°, sized for heavy chamfers on panels and steel beams for welding. The difference is in purpose: the KFM 100 K is a quick finishing tool for removing burrs and edges on finished parts; the KFM 200 M is a preparation machine for welding seams in heavy fabrication. For most workshops, the KFM 100 K is the right tool for daily deburring; the KFM 200 M only makes sense if V-chamfers for welding on steel thicker than 6-8 mm are regularly performed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). Weighing 3.5 kg, it is shipped in a carrying case and can be handled and used by one person. Original Bernardo TiN inserts, grinding wheels, and spare accessories are available from stock with shipping in 3-5 working days. Customer support is available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the KFM 100 K for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUseful tool for those who regularly work with metals and need to remove cutting burrs. For occasional use (a few operations per month), it may be oversized: consider economical handheld chamfering machines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical workshop \/ Blacksmith\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor quick deburring, chamfering edges on cut parts, post-welding finishing. TiN-coated inserts cover most metal materials. Suitable for daily artisanal use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy fabrication \/ Welding preparation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor deep V-chamfers (over 4 mm) for welding on thick steel, consider the KFM 200 M with a chamfer width up to 10 mm and angular adjustment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e deep chamfers over 4 mm wide (consider KFM 200 M); preparing welding seams on steel over 6-8 mm thick (KFM 200 M); working on internal radii smaller than 20 mm (requires smaller milling cutters).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eChamfering Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer Angle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixed 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer Width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0 – 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer Adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous, 0.1 mm increments\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workable internal radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCutter\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInsert material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTiN-coated carbide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotation speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e720 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – 50Hz – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine Dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 190 × 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 3.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e45° milling head\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTiN-coated carbide inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSide handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool set for insert changes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can I use the KFM 100 K on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steel, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, copper, engineering plastics. TiN inserts are suitable for all typical ferrous and non-ferrous metals used in fabrication.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTiN (titanium nitride) coated carbide inserts have significantly longer life than standard HSS inserts and maintain their edge at high operating temperatures. For stainless steel and high-strength steels, the feed rate should be reduced to avoid overheating the insert. For exclusive applications on special materials (titanium, nickel alloys), consult Krollit for dedicated inserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long do TiN inserts last?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn artisanal use, TiN inserts last from 200 to 500 linear meters of chamfering on mild steel before requiring rotation (they are reversible) or replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eActual life depends on the material being worked (stainless steel accelerates wear), the set chamfer thickness (4 mm wears faster than 1 mm), and the feed rate. Original Bernardo replacement TiN inserts are available from stock with shipping in 3-5 working days. For workshops with intensive use, it is advisable to keep at least a stock of inserts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between KFM 100 K and KFM 200 M?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KFM 100 K is a circular handheld chamfering machine, chamfer up to 4 mm, fixed 45° angle, weight 3.5 kg. The KFM 200 M is a 200 mm linear guide chamfering machine, chamfer up to 10 mm, adjustable angle 15°-45°, weight 11 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two machines address different needs. The KFM 100 K is a finishing tool: fast, lightweight, for deburring and small chamfers. The KFM 200 M is a preparation machine: it operates on panels and beams following a linear guide, for deep chamfers typical of welding seam preparation. For general workshops with predominantly finishing chamfering, the KFM 100 K is the right choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I work on internal radii with the KFM 100 K?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, up to a minimum internal radius of 20 mm. For narrower radii, the geometry of the milling head cannot access, and unworked residue will form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ability to work on internal radii distinguishes the KFM 100 K from fixed bench chamfering machines. The 20 mm limit covers the vast majority of metal fabrication parts with internal angles or curves. For chamfering on internal radii smaller than 20 mm, dedicated end mills mounted on pneumatic or electric rotary tools are required, not chamfering machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 720 W motor sufficient for continuous use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for artisanal-daily use. For continuous industrial cycles (over 4 hours a day), evaluate the thermal management of the motor with adequate breaks for heat dissipation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 720 W is sized for intensive intermittent use. The motor can reach high temperatures during prolonged continuous use, a condition that reduces the tool's lifespan. For workshops with high daily use, it is recommended to organize work with cooling breaks or consider chamfering machines with cooled motors sized for industrial cycles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693021204808,"sku":"05-1646","price":250.11,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_KFM_100_K_Smussatrice_circolare_compatta_45.jpg?v=1757489170"},{"product_id":"smussatrici-bernardo-kfm-200m-400v","title":"Bernardo KFM 200 M Portable Chamfering Machine – 400V, chamfer up to 10 mm, angle 15°-45°","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KFM 200 M portable chamfering machine offers a chamfer width of up to 10 mm at 45°, angle adjustment from 15°-45°, a 200 mm guide rail for linear stability, and a 0.55 kW three-phase 400V motor with a speed of 2,800 rpm. It is designed for preparing weld seams on steel panels, beams, and profiles with 90° surfaces. Weight: 11 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChamfer width at 45°:\u003c\/strong\u003e up to 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChamfer angle adjustment:\u003c\/strong\u003e 15° – 45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGuide rail:\u003c\/strong\u003e 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpeed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2,800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.55 kW – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 11 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the KFM 200 M and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KFM 200 M \/ 400V is a professional portable chamfering machine for preparing weld seams on steel panels, structural beams, and profiles with 90° surfaces. The 200 mm linear guide rail ensures that the milling head slides stably and repeatably, producing uniform chamfers over long lengths without the undulations or variations typical of free-hand chamfering machines. The 15°-45° angle adjustment allows the chamfer geometry to be adapted to the required welding type: open angles for full penetration welding, closed angles for filler welds. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by heavy metal fabricators, steel structure construction workshops, shipyards, and repair shops that require precise chamfers on workpieces up to 10 mm effective width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KFM 200 M is available in both a 400V three-phase version (this model) and a 230V single-phase version. The specifications are identical: only the power supply changes. The 400V version is preferable for continuous professional use due to the more consistent motor torque; the 230V version is the only choice for workshops without a three-phase line. In the Bernardo chamfering machine range, the KFM 200 M occupies the professional segment for preparing weld seams on light-to-medium fabrication. Below it is the KFM 100 K (free-hand, chamfer up to 4 mm) for quick finishing; above it are industrial chamfering machines with chamfer widths over 15 mm and guide rails up to 500 mm. For most fabrication workshops that do regular welding, the KFM 200 M is the standard preparation machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). At 11 kg, it is shipped in a carrying case and can be handled by one person. Original Bernardo spare inserts, grinding wheels, and accessories are available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the KFM 200 M is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine sized for professional weld preparation use. Cost and 400V three-phase power make it unsuitable for hobby use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal fabricator \/ professional welder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer up to 10 mm at 45° with adjustable angle is sized for standard weld seam preparation. Guide rail ensures repeatability.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy industrial fabrication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor chamfers over 10 mm effective width or guide rails over 200 mm, consider industrial chamfering machines with extended travel and more powerful motors.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e chamfers under 1 mm width (the machine is sized for weld preparation chamfers, not for fine finishing; consider KFM 100 K); workpieces with curved surfaces or angles not at 90° (require free-hand chamfering machines); workshops without a 400V three-phase line (choose KFM 200 M \/ 230V).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eChamfering capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer width at 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer angle adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuide rail length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotation speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – 50Hz – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e370 × 250 × 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 11 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e200 mm guide rail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMilling head\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCarbide inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I make chamfers wider than 10 mm in multiple passes?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn theory, yes, but alignment between consecutive passes is critical and produces visually irregular results. For chamfers over 10 mm, consider industrial chamfering machines with a higher nominal width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe precision of the 200 mm guide rail is optimized for a single pass up to 10 mm. Multiple passes require manual realignment which rarely produces coincident results without micro-steps. For shipyards and heavy fabrication with wide weld seams, industrial chamfering machines with a nominal width of up to 25-30 mm in a single pass are available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the 15°-45° angle adjustment cover all types of welding?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt covers the vast majority of standard welds: V at 60° (30°×2 chamfer), X at 60° (30°×2 double-sided chamfer), Y, K. For special welds with particular angles, verify the required geometry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChamfer angles of 30°-37.5° (achieved with 30°-37.5° adjustments on one side) are the most common for structural welding of standard steels. Narrow-groove welds (angles below 15°) or open-groove welds (angles above 45°) require specialized equipment or processing with specific milling cutters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between KFM 200 M \/ 400V and \/ 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey are identical except for the power supply: 400V three-phase vs 230V single-phase. Same chamfer specifications, weight, dimensions, 0.55 kW motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 400V three-phase version has more consistent motor torque in prolonged use and handles heat better in intensive cycles. The 230V single-phase version is the choice for workshops without a three-phase line: nearly identical performance on intermittent use. For workshops that have both lines available, the 400V is preferable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I also work on curved surfaces?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The 200 mm guide rail is designed for flat 90° surfaces. On curved surfaces, the machine does not slide uniformly, and the chamfer will be irregular.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor working on curved surfaces (vessels, tanks, tubular profiles), free-hand chamfering machines like the KFM 100 K are necessary, where the operator manually controls the pressure and feed speed. The KFM 200 M is specifically designed for panels and beams with constant cross-section and flat surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long do carbide inserts last?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional weld seam preparation use, inserts last from 100 to 300 linear meters of chamfering on mild steel before rotation or replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDurability depends on chamfer thickness (10 mm consumes 3-4 times faster than 3 mm), material (stainless steel reduces durability by 40-50%), and feed speed. For sites with intensive use, it is advisable to keep a stock of inserts. Original Bernardo spare inserts are available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693022024008,"sku":"05-1632","price":640.52,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_KFM_200_M_Smussatrice_portatile_400_V_compatta_ed_ergonomica.jpg?v=1757488697"},{"product_id":"bernardo-kfm-200m-smussatrice-portatile","title":"Bernardo KFM 200 M Portable Chamfering Machine – 230V, chamfer up to 10 mm, angle 15°-45°","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KFM 200 M \/ 230V portable chamfering machine offers a chamfer width of up to 10 mm at 45°, angle adjustment from 15°-45°, a 200 mm guide rail, a 0.55 kW single-phase 230V motor, and a speed of 2,800 rpm. This is the single-phase version of the KFM 200 M, identical in performance to the 400V three-phase version except for the power supply. Designed for weld seam preparation. Weight 11 kg. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChamfer width at 45°:\u003c\/strong\u003e up to 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChamfer angle adjustment:\u003c\/strong\u003e 15° – 45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGuide rail:\u003c\/strong\u003e 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpeed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2,800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.55 kW – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 11 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the KFM 200 M and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KFM 200 M \/ 230V is the single-phase version of the professional portable chamfering machine for workshops without a 400V three-phase line. The technical specifications are identical to the 400V three-phase version: chamfer width up to 10 mm at 45°, adjustable angle 15°-45°, 200 mm guide rail. The 0.55 kW single-phase motor is functionally equivalent to the three-phase for intermittent use and moderate duration cycles; for prolonged continuous use, the three-phase version maintains torque better. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by small and artisanal metalworking shops with only a 230V single-phase line that need to prepare weld seams on steel panels and beams up to 10 mm effective chamfer width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KFM 200 M \/ 230V shares everything with the KFM 200 M \/ 400V except the power supply type. Same milling head, same guide rail, same weight (11 kg), same chamfering capabilities. The choice between the two versions is dictated exclusively by the electrical system available in the workshop: with a 400V three-phase line, the three-phase version is preferable for continuous use; with only a 230V single-phase supply, this version is the only one that can be installed. Below the KFM 200 M, the Bernardo chamfering machine range offers the KFM 100 K for finishing chamfers on small radii; above it are industrial chamfering machines with chamfer widths over 15 mm for heavy metalwork.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Weighing 11 kg, it is shipped in a carrying case and can be handled by one person. Original Bernardo spare inserts, grinding wheels, and accessories are available from stock with 3-5 business days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the KFM 200 M for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine sized for professional weld preparation use. Even in the 230V version, the cost and 11 kg weight make it unsuitable for occasional hobby use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisanal metalworking shop \/ blacksmith with only 230V line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase version for workshops without a three-phase line. Same capabilities as the 400V version for intermittent use: chamfer up to 10 mm with angle adjustment 15°-45°.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetalworking shop with intensive continuous use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor prolonged continuous cycles (over 4 hours daily), the 400V three-phase version maintains torque better. If three-phase is available, it is preferable to choose it.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e chamfers under 1 mm width (consider KFM 100 K); pieces with curved surfaces or angles not at 90°; prolonged industrial continuous use (prefer the KFM 200 M \/ 400V three-phase).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eChamfering capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer width at 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfer angle adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuide rail length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotation speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – 50Hz – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e370 × 250 × 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 11 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e200 mm guide rail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMilling head\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCarbide inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it work on a standard 230V household outlet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 0.55 kW single-phase motor requires a standard 16A outlet. The power draw is manageable by a standard household\/artisan meter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 0.55 kW motor draws peak currents of 1-1.2 kW, which can be handled by a standard 3 kW household meter. For prolonged continuous use, the average consumption remains well below the tripping threshold of a standard circuit breaker. For workshops with other machines running simultaneously, check the available power of the meter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the performance the same as the 400V three-phase version?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intermittent use, yes. For prolonged continuous use (over 4 hours), the three-phase version maintains motor torque better and manages heat more effectively.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe practical difference between single-phase and three-phase at this power level is limited. For artisanal and construction site use, the 230V version offers more than adequate performance. Only for continuous industrial cycles on hard steels does the difference become noticeable, with the three-phase reducing the frequency of cooling breaks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I convert the 230V to 400V later?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, the motor is dedicated. To switch from single-phase to three-phase, you need to replace the machine with the 400V version.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single-phase and three-phase motors are completely different units, not interchangeable. The choice of version must be made based on the electrical system available at the time of purchase. If the workshop is undergoing electrical renovation with future installation of a three-phase line, it may be convenient to wait and purchase the three-phase version, which is more suitable for intensive use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply is required for an extension cord?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor extension cords longer than 5 meters, use a cable with a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm² to avoid voltage drops. For long extension cords (over 20 meters), consider a 4 mm² cross-section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KFM 200 M \/ 230V with a starting current draw of 1.2 kW requires correctly sized extension cords to avoid voltage drops that would reduce motor torque. Thin (1-1.5 mm²) coiled extension cords typical of construction sites are not suitable for prolonged use of this machine: they cause cable overheating and performance loss.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh with the carrying case?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e11 kg net without the case, approximately 13-14 kg with the carrying case. Manageable by one person for movement around a construction site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 11 kg weight is the working weight: the operator holds the machine with two hands during use. The carrying case makes it practical to move between construction sites. For sites with frequent transfers between work points, the KFM 200 M is sized to be easily carried by hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693024645448,"sku":"05-16320","price":640.52,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_KFM_200_M_Smussatrice_portatile_compatta_ed_ergonomica.jpg?v=1757433587"},{"product_id":"fresatrice-toupie-t-700-400-v","title":"Bernardo T 700 Router-Spindle Molder for wood – 400V, 700x700 mm table, Ø 30 mm spindle","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo T 700 \/ 400V wood shaper features a 700×700 mm grey cast iron table, a dynamically balanced Ø 30 mm spindle, 4 selectable speeds (1,800\/3,000\/6,000\/9,000 rpm) with quick V-belt change, 105 mm vertical spindle travel, Ø 100 mm dust extraction port, 2.2 kW S1 \/ 3.0 kW S6 three-phase 400V motor, and a digital speed display. Weight approx. 157 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTable size:\u003c\/strong\u003e 700 × 700 mm in grey cast iron\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle diameter:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpindle speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,800 \/ 3,000 \/ 6,000 \/ 9,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVertical spindle travel:\u003c\/strong\u003e 105 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMax tool diameter (profiling):\u003c\/strong\u003e 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.2 kW S1 \/ 3.0 kW S6 – 400V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 157 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the T 700 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo T 700 is a professional-grade vertical wood shaper, designed for profiling, routing, grooving, and shaping solid wood and panel pieces. The 700×700 mm grey cast iron table provides lasting stability and flatness; the dynamically balanced Ø 30 mm spindle works without vibration even with profiling tools up to Ø 200 mm. The four selectable speeds (1,800\/3,000\/6,000\/9,000 rpm) cover all applications: low speed for large diameter tools, high speed for small tools and finishing on hardwoods. The digital display provides an immediate reading of the set speed. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by artisanal carpentry shops, window and door manufacturers, and furniture makers who produce doors, door frames, decorative profiles, and assembly grooves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe T 700 is Bernardo's professional benchtop shaper. Below it in the woodworking range are benchtop vertical shapers with smaller tables, sized for light hobby-craft use. Above it, the range extends to industrial shapers with sliding tables, multiple shafts, and equipment for series profiling. The T 700 is sized for artisanal production: 4 speeds (vs. single-speed hobby shapers), 2.2 kW S1 motor (vs. 1.5 kW for basic models), 700×700 mm table. For those doing regular profiling on doors, windows, or panels, the T 700 is the benchmark machine. For industrial production of windows and doors, consider industrial shapers with sliding tables or dedicated profiling lines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). At 157 kg, it requires adequate means for unloading (pallet truck or hoist). Verify access to the workshop before delivery. Original Bernardo spare spindles, collets, profiling tools, and accessories are available from stock with shipping in 3-5 working days. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the T 700 is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine sized for professional use: for occasional hobby use, it may be oversized. Consider entry-level benchtop shapers for occasional needs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisanal carpentry (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700×700 mm table and 4 speeds cover profiling of doors, frames, and furniture. Ø 30 mm spindle handles professional tools. Three-phase 400V sized for daily use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWindow\/door production \/ industrial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor series production of windows\/doors, consider shapers with sliding tables and dedicated equipment. The T 700 is sized for artisanal production, not for high-volume industrial lines.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e series production of repetitive high-volume profiling (consider shapers with sliding tables or dedicated lines); workshops without a 400V three-phase line; profiling tools over Ø 200 mm (maximum machine capacity).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and spindle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 × 700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey cast iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e840 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical spindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUseful spindle length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax tool diameter (profiling)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax tool diameter under table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed change\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQuick V-belt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW (3.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower consumption S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400V – 50Hz – three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e930 × 760 × 1,160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 157 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInterchangeable spindle Ø 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInterchangeable spindles for end mills Ø 6, 8, 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCollets Ø 6, 8, 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSanding sleeve Ø 75 mm grit 100\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMiter fence\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital speed indicator\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation reversal (right\/left)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProtection device and pressure plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use end mills in addition to the Ø 30 mm spindle?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Interchangeable spindles for end mills Ø 6, 8, 12 mm with corresponding collets are included. They allow the use of standard end mills without purchasing additional equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Ø 30 mm spindle is the standard professional size for profiling tools. The interchangeable Ø 6, 8, 12 mm spindles allow the use of end mills typical for wood model making and finishing. Original Bernardo replacement collets are available from stock with shipping in 3-5 working days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do I change the spindle speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeed change is done via V-belt: open the side cover, move the belt to the desired pulley range, then close. This operation takes a few seconds and no additional tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe belt change system is standard on professional shapers: fast, reliable, and maintainable. The four speeds are pre-set on the pulleys: the operator chooses the correct combination for the tool diameter in use. The digital display confirms the actual speed, eliminating the risk of setting errors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the spindle dynamically balanced?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the Ø 30 mm spindle is dynamically balanced at the factory. Combined with the 157 kg grey cast iron structure, it ensures vibration-free machining even with large profiling tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDynamic balancing is critical for surface quality and the lifespan of spindle bearings. With large profiling tools (Ø 150-200 mm), an unbalanced spindle produces vibrations that leave marks on the surface and accelerate wear. Bernardo balancing is a constructive feature maintained in the professional range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs rotation reversal really useful?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, significantly. It allows working in the correct direction regardless of the workpiece orientation, eliminating the need to turn the piece to avoid tear-out.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRotation reversal (right\/left) is a feature found only on professional models. On wood with difficult grain or pieces with specific symmetry, the ability to reverse the direction of spindle rotation allows for always working 'with the grain' instead of 'against the grain,' reducing tear-out and improving finish. For the production of wooden windows and doors with complex profiles, this feature is particularly appreciated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much operating space is needed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 930 × 760 × 1,160 mm. For handling medium to large pieces, an operating area of at least 3 × 2.5 m with access to the front and two sides of the table is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 840 mm working height is ergonomic for standing operators. The 700×700 mm table handles standard carpentry-sized pieces; for larger pieces (over 1.5 m long), a lateral roller support is recommended to prevent tipping during routing. Krollit provides compatible roller supports as an optional accessory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693028479304,"sku":"09-12630","price":1854.46,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Toupie_compatta_T_700_per_falegnami.jpg?v=1752163247"},{"product_id":"macchine-mobili-per-lincollaggio-dei-bordi-peb-300-s","title":"Bernardo PEB 300 S Portable Edgebander – Complete kit, edge thickness 0.3-3 mm, height 10-65 mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe professional portable edgebander kit Bernardo PEB 300 S applies ABS, PVC, melamine, and veneered edges to straight and shaped panels with thicknesses of 0.3-3.0 mm and heights of 10-65 mm, minimum internal radius 25 mm, feed rate 4 m\/min, 855 W motor, heating time 4 minutes at 120°C, glue pot capacity 400 ml. Complete kit includes edgebander, edge trimmer KG 60 Duo, 0.8 kg glue pellets, VH 03 vacuum clamping set, KF 80 electric edge milling machine, 3 cases, support trolley. Edgebander weight 8 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEdge thickness (PVC\/ABS):\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.3 – 3.0 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkable edge height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10 – 65 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMinimum internal radius:\u003c\/strong\u003e 25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeating time:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 min at 120°C\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 855 W – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEdgebander weight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PEB 300 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PEB 300 S is a complete professional portable edgebander kit for applying ABS, PVC, melamine, and veneered edges to straight and shaped panels. The adjustable guiding system handles edges from 0.3 to 3.0 mm thick and heights from 10 to 65 mm, covering virtually the entire range of standard edges used in furniture production. Direct glue application to the edge (instead of the panel) eliminates the need to purchase pre-glued edges, significantly reducing operating costs. The complete kit includes the edgebander, a double edge trimmer (KG 60 Duo), VH 03 vacuum clamping set, KF 80 electric milling machine for finishing, 0.8 kg glue pellets, 3 transport cases, and a support trolley. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by artisan joineries, furniture manufacturers, custom kitchen manufacturers, and workshops that work with shaped panels where stationary edgebanders cannot operate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Bernardo edgebander range, the PEB 300 S is the professional entry-level portable kit. Above it, the PEB 500 V-S (complete professional kit) adds continuous feed speed adjustment (2-6 m\/min vs 4 m\/min fixed for the 300 S), digital temperature adjustment (exact setting vs 120-200°C preset), and additional accessories. The practical difference between the PEB 300 S and PEB 500 V-S is seen in production: the 500 V-S allows adjusting speed and temperature to the specific edge type, optimizing bonding on different materials. For workshops with a variety of edges and significant production volumes, the 500 V-S justifies the price difference. For artisanal use with standard edges, the PEB 300 S is correctly sized. Above both in the Bernardo range are stationary edgebanders for serial production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). The kit is shipped in 3 separate transport cases plus a support trolley: easy handling by one person. Glue pellets, edges, spare edgebanders, and original Bernardo accessories available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PEB 300 S for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional kit sized for continuous use. For occasional applications on panels (1-2 per month) the cost is oversized: consider pre-glued edges with an iron.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan joinery \/ furniture factory\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eComplete solution for applying edges to shaped and curved panels that stationary edgebanders cannot handle. Independence from purchasing pre-glued edges reduces operating costs.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCustom kitchens \/ furniture production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor panels with curvatures and minimum radii of 25 mm (impossible on stationary edgebanders). Kit includes all tools for a complete cycle: gluing + trimming + finishing.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e serial production of standard straight panels at high frequency (consider automatic stationary edgebanders); applications with edges below 0.3 mm or above 3 mm thick (design limits); internal radii less than 25 mm (the edging head cannot access them).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEdging capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC\/ABS edge thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.3 – 3.0 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEdge height (min – max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 – 65 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workable internal radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eABS, PVC, melamine, veneer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGlue system\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeating time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 min (at 120°C)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 – 200 °C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlue pot capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 ml\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect on the edge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e855 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – 50Hz – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 × 300 × 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEdgebander weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.0 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo PEB 300 S edgebander\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKG 60 Duo double edge trimmer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e0.8 kg glue pellets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVH 03 vacuum clamping set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKF 80 electric edge milling machine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 transport cases\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport trolley\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I apply edges to curved and shaped panels?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, up to a minimum internal radius of 25 mm. This is the most significant practical difference compared to stationary edgebanders, which only work with straight panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ability to work with shaped panels is what makes the portable edgebander indispensable for certain processes: kitchens with rounded corners, shaped furniture, installations with curves. The 25 mm internal radius limit covers the vast majority of standard curvatures in furniture. For panels with radii under 25 mm, the edge must be applied using other techniques (e.g., manually with hot melt glue).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much glue pellets are needed per meter of edge?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically 5-8 grams of pellets per linear meter of edge, depending on the thickness of the applied edge. A 400 ml pot (approximately 250 g of pellets) covers 30-50 meters of edgebanding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConsumption varies with application speed, edge thickness, and set temperature. For continuous use, it is recommended to keep a stock of original Bernardo pellets. Original replacement pellets are available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the average time to apply an edge to a kitchen door?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a standard kitchen door (perimeter approximately 2 meters), the complete cycle (gluing + trimming + finishing with KF 80) takes 5-8 minutes, after the initial 4 minutes of heating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnce the machine is at temperature, the cycle is continuous: the edge is applied along the sides, trimmed with the KG 60 Duo, and finished with the KF 80. The initial 4-minute heating is a one-time cost; for producing multiple consecutive pieces, the flow becomes very fast. For serial production of doors, consider the PEB 500 V-S with variable speed to optimize the flow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the machine also work well on solid wood veneered edges?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Natural veneer is one of the standard supported materials. The adjustable guiding system handles typical veneer tolerances without problems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNatural veneers (oak, walnut, cherry) require the correct working temperature (typically 160-180°C, adjustable on the PEB 300 S at two levels: 120 and 180-200°C) to ensure durable bonding without burning the wood. For high-quality veneers or difficult woods, the fine temperature adjustment available on the PEB 500 V-S can make a difference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use pre-glued edges instead of applying glue?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTechnically yes, but it reduces the versatility of the machine and is not the optimal way to use it. The main advantage of the PEB 300 S is to eliminate dependence on pre-glued edges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePre-glued edges are more expensive (15-30% more) and available in a limited color range. With the PEB 300 S, you purchase standard unglued PVC\/ABS or veneer edges, chosen from a much wider range. The original Bernardo glue pellets applied by the machine have excellent yield and durability equivalent to or superior to industrial pre-glued edges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693029527880,"sku":"14-2002","price":1720.05,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Bernardo_PEB_300_S_kit_bordatrice_portatile_professionale.jpg?v=1773845679"},{"product_id":"macchine-mobili-per-lincollaggio-dei-bordi-peb-500-v-s","title":"Bernardo PEB 500 V-S Portable Edge Bander - Complete kit, variable speed 2-6 m\/min, digital temperature control","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PEB 500 V-S professional portable edge bander kit applies ABS, PVC, melamine, and veneered edges to straight and shaped panels with thicknesses of 0.3-3.0 mm and heights of 10-65 mm, with a minimum internal radius of 25 mm. Variable feed speed 2-6 m\/min, digital temperature adjustment on two levels (120-200°C primary, 80-155°C secondary), glue tank capacity 400 ml, 855 W motor. The complete kit includes the edge bander, KG 60 Duo trimmer, KF 80 milling machine, VH 03 vacuum set, glue granules, and mobile cart. Edge bander weight 8.1 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEdge thickness (PVC\/ABS):\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.3 – 3.0 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkable edge height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10 – 65 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFeed speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 – 6 m\/min variable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking temperature level 1:\u003c\/strong\u003e 120 – 200 °C\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorking temperature level 2:\u003c\/strong\u003e 80 – 155 °C\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 855 W – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEdge bander weight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 8.1 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PEB 500 V-S and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PEB 500 V-S is the complete professional portable edge bander kit in the Bernardo range: compared to the PEB 300 S, it adds continuous feed speed adjustment (variable 2-6 m\/min vs fixed 4 m\/min) and digital temperature adjustment on two operating levels. The ability to adapt speed and temperature to the specific type of edge and panel material distinguishes the PEB 500 V-S as a production machine: thin edges and veneers require higher speeds and lower temperatures, while thick ABS\/PVC edges on dense panels require lower speeds and higher temperatures. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by joineries with a variety of edges in production, furniture manufacturers with significant production volumes, and custom kitchen workshops that work with panels of different materials and finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PEB 500 V-S is the top of the range of Bernardo portable edge banders. Below it is the PEB 300 S (fixed speed 4 m\/min, preset temperature 120-200°C) for standard artisanal use. The mechanical specifications are identical (capacity 0.3-3 mm, height 10-65 mm, minimum radius 25 mm, 855 W motor): the difference is in the controls. Variable speed and digital temperature adjustment allow for proper processing of edges that the PEB 300 S can only handle as a compromise: for example, thin walnut or cherry veneers, where too high temperatures burn the wood. For workshops that primarily work with standard furniture edges, the PEB 300 S is correctly sized; for manufacturers who want the flexibility to handle any material optimally, the PEB 500 V-S is the logical choice. Above it in the Bernardo range are automatic stationary edge banders for series production on straight panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). The kit is shipped on a mobile cart which simplifies transport and handling in the workshop. Glue granules, edges, and original Bernardo spare accessories available from stock with 3-5 working days shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PEB 500 V-S for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional kit sized for continuous use. For occasional applications, the PEB 300 S is sufficient at a lower cost.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJoinery with a variety of edges and materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed and digital temperature adjustment allow for optimizing bonding for different edges and materials. The practical difference is seen on natural veneers and thin edges.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFurniture factory \/ series production on shaped parts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor manufacturers with significant volumes and the need to handle shaped panels that stationary edge banders cannot process. The mobile cart facilitates movement in the workshop.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e series production of standard straight panels at very high speeds (consider automatic stationary edge banders); applications with edges below 0.3 mm or above 3 mm thickness; internal radii less than 25 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEdging capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC\/ABS edge thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.3 – 3.0 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEdge height (min – max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 – 65 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workable internal radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eABS, PVC, melamine, veneer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGlue system and adjustment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeating time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 min (at 120°C)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking temperature level 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 – 200 °C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking temperature level 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 – 155 °C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlue tank capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 ml\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect on edge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeed and motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 – 6 m\/min (continuous, adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e855 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – 50Hz – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 × 300 × 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEdge bander weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 8.1 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBernardo PEB 500 V-S edge bander\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKG 60 Duo double edge trimmer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e0.8 kg glue granules\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContinuous feed adjustment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital temperature setting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVH 03 vacuum clamping set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKF 80 electric edge milling machine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 carrying cases\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMobile cart\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the price difference compared to the PEB 300 S worth it?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the use: for workshops with a variety of edges and materials, yes, because optimal speed and temperature for each material produce more durable bonds. For use with standard edges, the PEB 300 S is sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe practical difference is seen in two specific cases: 1) fine natural veneers, where the temperature needs to be lowered below the standard 120°C to avoid burning; 2) thin edges (0.3-0.5 mm) that require a higher speed than the fixed 4 m\/min. For those who do not work with these materials, the PEB 300 S is correctly sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I set the exact temperature in degrees?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the digital adjustment allows you to set a specific value between the two levels (120-200°C primary, 80-155°C secondary), unlike the PEB 300 S which only has preset settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops that regularly work with the same selection of edges and materials, once the optimal temperature for each combination is found, it is stored. Precise adjustment allows for optimizations that affect the quality of the finished edge: too low temperatures result in weak bonds, too high temperatures produce glue squeeze-out and localized burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the variable speed really reduce working times?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, especially on shaped panels or panels of variable length. The higher speed (6 m\/min) is used on long straight sections, while the lower speed (2 m\/min) is used on tight curves or corners to ensure uniform bonding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe advantage of variable speed is not only in time: on tight curves, reduced speed allows the edge to adapt to the curvature without ripples or detachments. On straight sections, high speed allows the panel to glide quickly while maintaining bonding quality. The PEB 300 S at a fixed speed of 4 m\/min is a compromise that works well on standard panels but does not optimize extreme cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the included mobile cart really practical?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is the visible practical difference compared to the PEB 300 S which has 3 cases but no dedicated cart. The cart allows you to transport the entire kit to the workshop or between workstations, keeping the machine ready for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mobile cart is designed to integrate the edge bander + accessories into a single transportable unit. For workshops with multiple workstations, the machine moves where needed without having to unload and reload the cases. For cramped workshops, the cart also allows for compact storage of the machine when not in use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I use different edges in the same process by changing the temperature?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, this is one of the main advantages of the PEB 500 V-S. Digital adjustment allows for quick setting changes between one material and another, optimizing each application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops that produce furniture with different edges (PVC on one door, veneer on another), the flexibility of the PEB 500 V-S allows them to work on the entire project with the same machine, adjusting only the parameters between operations. On the PEB 300 S, the two temperature presets cover most cases but do not allow for fine adjustments for specific materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693031919944,"sku":"14-2007","price":1998.21,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Set_bordatrice_PEB_500_V-S_completo_con_accessori_professionali.jpg?v=1773920587"},{"product_id":"bernardo-piegatrice-angolare-wb-200-s","title":"Bernardo WB 200 S Manual Angle Bender – flat steel up to 100x7 mm cold, 100x15 mm hot","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 200 S manual angle bender cold bends flat steel up to 100×7 mm and round bars Ø 22 mm, hot bends up to 100×15 mm and Ø 27 mm. Capacity on copper 100×12 mm, aluminum 100×15 mm, angle steel sections 100×10 mm cold and 100×15 mm hot. Weight 33 kg. Standard equipment: bending plate, continuous angle stop, eccentric clamping block, material stop. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlat steel capacity (cold):\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 × 7 mm \/ 65 × 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlat steel capacity (hot):\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 × 15 mm \/ 75 × 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRound steel capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 22 mm cold \/ Ø 27 mm hot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAngle steel capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 × 10 mm cold \/ 100 × 15 mm hot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCopper capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 × 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminum capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100 × 15 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 33 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WB 200 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 200 S is the top-of-the-range manual angle bender from Bernardo, sized for demanding bends on steel flats up to 100 mm wide and angle sections up to 100×10 mm. Compared to the WB 70 S, its capacity increases across all parameters: wider flats, thicker bars, heavier angles. The 33 kg structure provides superior stability during bending, which is necessary when exerting high forces to bend substantial angle sections. It works cold for standard pieces and hot for thicker materials, following the same logic as all Bernardo manual bending machines. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by professional blacksmiths, manufacturers of structural gates and railings, light carpentry workshops, and workshops that regularly work with heavy angles or wide flats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Bernardo range of manual angle bending machines, the WB 200 S is the top model. Below it is the WB 70 S (flat capacity up to 70×5 mm cold, weight 20.5 kg) for workshops with more modest needs. The capacities of the WB 200 S cover the vast majority of light carpentry and professional blacksmith work: bending angles for gates, structural railings, metal door frames, mechanical supports. For workshops that continuously work with angles over 100×10 mm or flats over 100×15 mm, hydraulic bending machines would be necessary, but the vast majority of blacksmith work falls within the capabilities of the WB 200 S. Above the manual bending machines in the Bernardo range are motorized bending machines for sheet metal work (TBM 2020, TBM 3020) and industrial hydraulic bending machines (AKPL, press brakes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). With 33 kg, it can be moved carefully by one person or easily by two people. It must be secured to a sturdy workbench. Interchangeable plates and original Bernardo spare parts are available from stock with 3-5 working day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the WB 200 S is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate metal hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCapacities exceed standard hobbyist needs. For occasional use, the lower-cost WB 70 S may suffice.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional blacksmith \/ light carpentry workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCapacities for 100×7 mm flats cold and 100×10 mm angles cover the vast majority of daily light carpentry work. The 33 kg structure provides adequate stability.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGate \/ structural railing manufacturer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor regular bending of substantial angle sections and heavy profiles. The machine is sized for daily craft use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e bending steel flats over 100×7 mm cold or over 100×15 mm hot (design limits); sheet metal fabrication (TB bench folders or TBM motorized folders); repetitive, high-volume bending in series production (consider hydraulic bending machines with automatic positioning).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFlat steel capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 7 mm \/ 65 × 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 15 mm \/ 75 × 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBar capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound steel (cold)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 22 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound steel (hot)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 27 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare steel (cold)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 × 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare steel (hot)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25 × 25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAngle capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle steel (cold)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle steel (hot)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 15 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCapacity on other metals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCopper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 × 15 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 × 430 × 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 33 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBending plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContinuous angle stop\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEccentric clamping block\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial stop\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the concrete difference compared to the WB 70 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WB 200 S bends flats up to 100×7 mm cold (vs 70×5 mm), angles up to 100×10 mm (vs 60×8 mm), round bars up to Ø 22 mm (vs Ø 18 mm). It weighs 33 kg vs 20.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WB 200 S is designed for professional workshops with daily work on significant sections. For artisanal blacksmiths with occasional work, the WB 70 S is appropriately sized and costs less. For those who regularly make gates and structural railings with heavy angles, the WB 200 S is the right investment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I bend 100×10 mm angles cold without problems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, that is the machine's nominal cold capacity. It requires significant force on the lever: for pieces near the maximum limit, it is advisable to slightly heat the bending point to reduce effort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe nominal capacity is verified by Bernardo under standard laboratory conditions. In the workshop, material quality (mild steel vs high-strength structural steel) can affect the force required. For repetitive bends on large angles, it is advisable to slightly heat the bending point: this reduces operator effort and machine wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the included bending plate sufficient for most jobs?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor bending angles, standard flats, and bars, the supplied plate covers the vast majority of operations. For specific bending radii, optional radius plates are available (R10, R15, R20, R25).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WB 200 S in standard configuration is optimized for sharp angular bends. For workshops that regularly perform specific bending radii (curved frames, artistic decorations), radius plates are available as optional accessories. Krollit provides information on compatible optional plates upon request.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine truly suitable for daily professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but as it is a manual bending machine, its productivity depends on the operator. For high-volume series production, consider hydraulic bending machines with automatic positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WB 200 S is structurally sized for daily professional use: its 33 kg weight and robust geometry withstand continuous work cycles. The limit is ergonomic rather than mechanical: for long shifts with repetitive bends, operator fatigue becomes the limiting factor. For series production of standard parts, a motorized or hydraulic bending machine would reduce effort and increase output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed to install it in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 900 × 430 × 310 mm. It must be secured to a sturdy workbench. For handling pieces, an operating space of at least 3 × 1.5 m is needed, considering long bars and profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe support bench must be sized to withstand significant lateral forces during bending. For bending 100 mm angles, the lever exerts significant forces on the work surface: a light or unstable bench becomes dangerous. For workshops without an adequate structural bench, a dedicated Bernardo base is available as an optional accessory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693034705224,"sku":"06-1061","price":475.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Piegatrice_angolare_Bernardo_WB_200_S.jpg?v=1758191409"},{"product_id":"bernardo-piegatrice-angolare-wb-70-s","title":"Bernardo WB 70 S Manual Angle Bender – flat steel up to 70×5 mm cold, 70×15 mm hot","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 70 S manual angle bender cold bends steel flats up to 70×5 mm and round bars Ø 18 mm, and hot bends up to 70×15 mm and Ø 25 mm. Capacity on copper 70×10 mm, on aluminum 70×15 mm, steel angle profiles 60×8 mm cold and 70×15 mm hot. Weight 20.5 kg. Includes: sharp\/rounded plate, R10\/R15 and R20\/R25 radius plates, round bar plate, offset plate, eccentric clamp, angle and material stops. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel flat capacity (cold):\u003c\/strong\u003e 70 × 5 mm \/ 40 × 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel flat capacity (hot):\u003c\/strong\u003e 70 × 15 mm \/ 50 × 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel round bar capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ø 18 mm cold \/ Ø 25 mm hot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel angle capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 60 × 8 mm cold \/ 70 × 15 mm hot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCopper capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 70 × 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminum capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 70 × 15 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 20.5 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WB 70 S and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo WB 70 S is a compact manual angle bender for locksmiths' workshops, maintenance workers, metal hobbyists, and artisan workshops. It works cold and hot on steel, copper, and aluminum: cold for thin pieces (up to 5 mm on steel flat), hot for thicker pieces (up to 15 mm on steel flat). The six interchangeable plates (sharp\/rounded, two radius plates R10\/R15 and R20\/R25, round bar plate, offset plate, eccentric clamp) cover the vast majority of artisanal bending needs: sharp angles, standard bending radii, bending of round bars. The included angle and material stops allow repeatability in serial bending. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by blacksmiths, gate and artistic railing manufacturers, metal furniture restorers, metalworking schools, and maintenance workshops that perform occasional but frequent bends.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Bernardo range of manual angle benders, the WB 70 S is the entry model for artisan use. Above it is the WB 200 S (flat capacity 100×7 mm cold and 100×15 mm hot, weight 33 kg) for more demanding bends. The practical difference is in scale: the WB 70 S handles flats up to 70 mm wide, the WB 200 S reaches 100 mm. For blacksmiths who primarily work with thin flats (up to 5 mm), small round tubes, and light angles, the WB 70 S is correctly sized. For workshops that regularly perform bends on heavy angles or wide flats, the WB 200 S is needed. Above the manual benders, Bernardo offers motorized benders (TBM 2020, TBM 3020) for sheet metal production up to 3 meters in length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). At 20.5 kg, it can be moved by one person. It must be secured to a sturdy workbench using the mounting holes on the base. Interchangeable plates and original Bernardo spare parts are available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the WB 70 S is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate metal hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandy and complete tool for occasional bending of steel, copper, aluminum. Six interchangeable plates cover the vast majority of artisanal work.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan blacksmith \/ gate builder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSufficient capacity for standard bends of angles, thin flats, and round bars. Included stops allow repeatability in series. Weight 20.5 kg easy to manage.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical workshop \/ professional production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdequate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor frequent bending of flats over 70×5 mm cold or angle profiles over 60×8 mm, consider WB 200 S. For sheet metal production, consider TBM motorized benders.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e bending steel flats over 70×5 mm cold or over 70×15 mm hot (design limits); long sheet metal production (consider manual bench benders TB or motorized TBM); high-cadence repetitive bending (the machine is manual, not automatic).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCapacity on steel flat\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 × 5 mm \/ 40 × 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 × 15 mm \/ 50 × 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCapacity on bars\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel round (cold)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel round (hot)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel square (cold)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 × 16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel square (hot)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 × 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCapacity on angle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel angle (cold)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 × 8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel angle (hot)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 × 15 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCapacity on other metals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCopper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 × 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 × 15 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e760 × 280 × 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 20.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSharp\/rounded bending plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRadius bending plate R20 \/ R25\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRadius bending plate R10 \/ R15\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRound bar plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOffset plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEccentric clamping block\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAngle stop\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial stop\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat do 'cold' and 'hot' mean in the capacities?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCold: the workpiece is bent at room temperature. Hot: the workpiece is heated (with a torch or forge) before bending, reaching red heat (700-900°C) to reduce material resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHot bending allows working with thicknesses and hardnesses that would otherwise be impossible manually. At 800°C, mild steel has its resistance reduced to about 20% of its cold value, allowing bends that would otherwise require hydraulic presses. The WB 70 S, like all manual benders, uses both techniques: the nominal 'hot' capacity is understood with the workpiece properly heated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many bends per minute can I make?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs this is a manual bender, the rate depends on the operator. For standard bends on thin flats, a skilled person can achieve 5-10 bends per minute. For hot bends, the pace is dictated by the workpiece heating time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WB 70 S is designed for artisanal use: speed is not a key feature. For high-cadence series production, consider motorized benders. The included angle and material stops improve repeatability between consecutive bends, reducing workpiece positioning times.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan I bend tubes (not round bars)?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSolid tubes can be bent like round bars up to Ø 18 mm cold and Ø 25 mm hot. Hollow tubes require attention: without filling (sand or molten lead), they will flatten during bending.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor correct bending of hollow tubes, dedicated tube benders or roll benders are recommended (Bernardo has a separate range of tube benders). The WB 70 S only bends hollow tubes if properly filled to prevent flattening, a traditional but laborious artisanal technique. For regular bending of hollow tubes, it is recommended to invest in a dedicated tube bender.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it need to be fixed to a workbench or can it be used freestanding?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt must be secured to a sturdy workbench using the mounting holes on the base. The force exerted on the lever during bending requires stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbench must be sized to withstand significant lateral forces during bending: a light or unstable workbench makes the bender imprecise and dangerous. For workshops without a suitable workbench, a dedicated base is available as an optional accessory. Krollit provides information on compatible bases upon request.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference with the WB 200 S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WB 200 S has higher capacities (flat 100×7 mm cold vs 70×5, angles 100×10 vs 60×8 cold) and weighs 33 kg (vs 20.5). It is sized for more demanding bends.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe choice depends on the typical work in the workshop. For artisan blacksmiths who mainly work with thin flats and small bars, the WB 70 S is adequate. For workshops that regularly perform angles over 60×8 mm or flats wider than 70 mm, the WB 200 S is the logical choice. The price difference is small: for growing workshops, it may be strategically preferable to start directly with the WB 200 S.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50693035393352,"sku":"06-1059B","price":317.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Piegatrice_angolare_Bernardo_WB_70_S.jpg?v=1758191842"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.krollit.com\/collections\/tutti-prodotti.oembed?page=4","provider":"Krollit","version":"1.0","type":"link"}